JP5756981B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention has a movable member that can be converted into a closed state that does not accept a game ball that flows down the game area by closing the ball inlet and an open state that accepts a game ball that flows down the game area by opening the ball inlet The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a winning device.

Conventional gaming machines, for example, pachinko gaming machines, are equipped with an image display device capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the variable display is based on the winning of a game ball at the start opening provided in the game area. When the game is executed and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special game state is generated in which the variable winning device provided in the game area is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined release pattern over a plurality of rounds. Things are common.
In such a gaming machine, the display area of the image display device is made to face a window portion opened in the back of a concave chamber-shaped enclosure frame (so-called center case) whose front surface is open, and the enclosure frame body There is one in which a single opening type variable winning device including a movable member (rotating member) that is tilted toward a side game area is disposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2).

JP 2006-61666 A JP 2010-136989 A

By the way, in a recent gaming machine equipped with a single-open type variable winning device as described in the above-mentioned patent document, the movable member can be made smaller or movable for reasons such as setting an appropriate winning rate of a game ball. There is an increasing tendency to narrow the range.
Therefore, even when the movable member operates, there is a problem that the force that the variable winning device is open is not easily transmitted to the player, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the fun of the game by emphasizing the opening operation of the variable winning device.

The invention described in claim 1
A variable winning device having a movable member that can be converted into a closed state that does not accept a game ball flowing down the game area by closing the ball introduction port and an open state that accepts a game ball flowing down the game area by opening the ball introduction port In the gaming machine
The variable winning device is:
An inner space in which the ball introduction port is formed on one side and the inflow of game balls is restricted;
An effect movable member disposed in the internal space and capable of being converted into a predetermined first state and a second state for emphasizing the conversion of the movable member into an open state;
A light emitting member capable of causing the variable winning device to emit light,
The production movable member is configured to convert from the first state to the second state in accordance with the conversion of the movable member from the closed state to the open state.

Other inventions related to this application are:
A variable winning device having a movable member that can be converted into a closed state that does not accept a game ball flowing down the game area by closing the ball introduction port and an open state that accepts a game ball flowing down the game area by opening the ball introduction port In the gaming machine
The variable winning device is:
An effect movable member that can be converted into a predetermined first state and a second state for emphasizing the conversion of the movable member to an open state,
The production movable member is configured to convert from the first state to the second state in accordance with the conversion of the movable member from the closed state to the open state.

  According to this invention, since the effect movable member is converted to the second state as the movable member is converted to the open state, it is possible to emphasize the opening operation of the variable winning device. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an image as if the variable winning device is performing a large opening operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Another invention according to the present application is the above gaming machine,
The variable prize winning device has an inner space in which the ball introduction port is formed on one side and inflow of game balls is restricted,
The effect movable member is disposed in the internal space and is convertible between the first state and the second state.

  According to the present invention, the effect movable member is disposed in the internal space and can be converted into the first state and the second state. Therefore, even if the effect movable member is provided, the winning state of the game ball in the variable winning device changes. Never do. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the opening operation of the variable winning device without changing the winning state of the game ball in the variable winning device.

Another invention according to the present application is the above gaming machine,
The movable member is in a standing posture in the closed state and closes the ball inlet, while in the open state, the movable member is tilted toward the game area on the side and opens the ball inlet.
The effect movable member is disposed in the internal space so as to face the movable member, and is in a standing posture in the first state, while tilted toward the opposite side to the movable member in the second state. It is characterized by becoming.

  According to the present invention, the effect movable member emphasizes the opening operation of the variable prize winning device by moving symmetrically with the movable member, so that the player can have an image as if the ball introduction opening is fully opened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Another invention according to the present application is the above gaming machine,
The variable winning device includes a partition member having a predetermined thickness that defines the internal space,
The partition member is formed with a retracting portion that is recessed outward at a position corresponding to the effect movable member,
In the second state, the effect movable member is configured such that a tilted tip portion enters the retracting portion.

  According to this invention, since the retracting portion is formed in the partition member, even if the production movable member is enlarged or the movable range of the production movable member is set wide, the variable prize apparatus is not enlarged more than necessary. That's it. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the opening operation of the variable winning device without enlarging the variable winning device.

Another invention according to the present application is the above gaming machine,
The variable winning device is:
It is characterized by comprising a regulating wall part capable of regulating the movement of the game ball received in the internal space from the ball introduction port to the effect movable member side.

  According to this invention, since the game ball received in the internal space is restricted from moving toward the effect movable member by the restriction wall, the game ball received in the internal space is operated by the effect movable member. Will not be adversely affected.

  According to the present invention, since the effect movable member converts to the second state with the conversion of the movable member to the open state, it is possible to emphasize the opening operation of the variable winning device. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an image as if the variable winning device is performing a large opening operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the game board from the front side. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the effect control unit as seen from the front side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st case member from the front side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st case member from the back side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper left part of the 1st case member from the rear surface side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower left part of the 1st case member from the rear surface side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd case member from the front side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd case member from the back side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper right part of the 2nd case member from the front side, and FIG.8 (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower right side of the 2nd case member from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the display unit from the back side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left upper part of the 1st case member in the state where the display apparatus was accommodated in the panel accommodation recessed part from the rear surface side, (b) is a display apparatus accommodated in the panel accommodation recessed part. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the right part of the 1st case member of the state which looked from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper surface left side of the display unit from the rear surface side. It is a front view of a display unit. (A) is a figure which shows the cross-sectional upper side which follows the AA line in FIG. 12, (b) is a figure which shows the cross-sectional lower side which follows the AA line in FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the cross-sectional right side which follows the BB line in FIG. 12, (b) is a figure which shows the cross-sectional left side which follows the BB line in FIG. (A) is a figure which shows one modification of a display unit, (b) is a figure which shows another modification of a display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the center case unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd special variation winning device from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rear side part of the 2nd special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front side part of the 2nd special variation prize-winning apparatus from the front side, It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front side part of the 2nd special variation prize-winning apparatus from the rear surface side. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable arm member from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the rear surface side of the 2nd special variation winning device. (A) is a figure which shows the state of the drive mechanism of the 2nd special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus when a guidance movable member is a closed state, (b) is the 2nd special when a guidance movable member is an open state. It is a figure which shows the state of the drive mechanism of a variable prize apparatus. It is sectional drawing which looked at the 2nd special variation prize-winning apparatus from the left side. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left side of the game board from the front side. It is a figure for demonstrating winning of a game ball to the 2nd special variation winning device. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the upper effect unit as seen from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable mechanism part from the front side. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable guide part from the front side, FIG.29 (b) is the perspective view which looked at the movable guide part from the front side. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the decoration movable part from the front side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the decoration movable part from the lower surface side. (A) is a front view of the upper stage production unit when the decorative movable part is at the initial position, and (b) is a diagram when the illustration of the movable lens member is omitted in (a). (A) is a front view of the upper effect unit when the decorative movable part is in a position moved downward from the initial position, and is a diagram in the case where illustration of the movable lens member is omitted, (b) These are figures when not showing illustration of a movable lens member in (a). It is sectional drawing which looked at the top production | presentation unit in the case where it exists in the position which the decoration movable part moved to the downward direction from the initial position from the right side surface side. It is a figure which shows one modification of an upper stage production | generation unit, Comprising: It is the perspective view which looked at the decoration rotation board with which the said upper stage production unit is provided from the front side. It is a figure which shows one modification of an upper production | presentation unit, Comprising: It is a front view of the principal part of this upper production | presentation unit. It is a figure showing one modification of an upper production unit, and is a front view of the important section of the upper production unit. It is a figure showing one modification of an upper production unit, and is a front view of the important section of the upper production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the side part production unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable decoration member from the back side. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the base end side movable body in the state which the joint part extended, and the front end side movable body. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the base end side movable body and distal end side movable body when the front end side movable body rotates to one side from the state which the joint part extended. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the base end side movable body and tip side movable body when the front end side movable body rotates to the other from the state in which the joint part was extended. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the unit base member, the drive mechanism part, and the permanent magnet from the rear surface side. (A) is a front view which shows the state which attached the drive mechanism part and the permanent magnet to the unit base member, (b) looked at the state which attached the drive mechanism part and the permanent magnet to the unit base member from the upper surface side. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the side part production unit in the case where a movable decoration member is a normal state from the front side. It is a front view of a side part production unit in case a movable decoration member is a normal state. It is a front view of a side part production unit in case a movable decoration member is the 1st operation state. It is a front view of a side part production unit in case a movable decoration member is in the 2nd operation state. It is a front view of a side part production unit in case a movable decoration member is the 3rd operation state. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering mechanism unit as viewed from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower movable unit from the front side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the decoration guide unit from the front side, (b) is the right view of the decoration guide unit 1300. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the effect movable unit as seen from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable part from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable part from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the drive part from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive part from the front side. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the mechanism part from the front side, (b) is the top view of a mechanism part. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower production unit in the case where a movable part exists in an initial position from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower production unit in the case where it exists in the position where the movable part moved upwards from the initial position from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the shutter unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left shutter drive part from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left back side shutter unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left front shutter unit from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the left front side back box member from the front side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left front side shutter base with which the production | presentation movable member and the biasing member were mounted | worn from the rear surface side, (b) is an enlarged view of the biasing member vicinity in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left shutter unit when the left back shutter unit and the left front shutter unit are in the initial position from the front side. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the left side shutter drive part and the left front side shutter unit in case a left front side shutter unit exists in an initial position. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the left back side shutter unit and the left front side shutter unit in the case of moving to the shielding position from an initial position. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the left back side shutter unit and the left front side shutter unit in the case of moving to the initial position from a shielding position. It is the perspective view which looked at the production mechanism unit from the front side. FIG. 72 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the left shutter unit in FIG. 71. FIG. 11 is a front view of the effect mechanism unit when the main contact portion and the driven contact receiving portion are in contact with each other. It is a front view of the rendering mechanism unit when the shutter unit is in the shielding state. It is the perspective view which looked at the production | presentation mechanism unit in case a shutter unit is a shielding state from the rear surface side. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between an effect mechanism unit and a center case unit in case a shutter unit is a shielding state. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 1st special variation winning device from the front side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st special variation prize-winning apparatus in the case where an opening-and-closing door is a closed state from the front side, (b) is the 1st special variation prize-winning in the case where an opening-and-closing door is an open state. It is the perspective view which looked at the apparatus from the front side. It is sectional drawing which looked at the 1st special variation winning device from the right side. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a main process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a main process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure game processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a special figure normal process. It is a figure for demonstrating a jackpot symbol information table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation group selection table. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation group selection table. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation group selection table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a fluctuation | variation start information setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 1st main processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating interruption processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 2nd main processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 1st scene control processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a customer waiting process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a customer waiting decoration aspect. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart for demonstrating an accessory action pattern setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating an accessory operation | movement selection table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a prior determination command reception process. It is a figure for demonstrating a prior production distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of the reduced display of identification information. It is a figure which shows an example of the modification of the reduction display of identification information. It is a figure for demonstrating the method of the fluctuation | variation display of a 4th symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the modification of a 4th pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of one notification effect. It is a figure which shows an example of one notification effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the modification 1 of one notification effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the modification 2 of one notification production | presentation.

DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to a main body frame (outer frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (inner frame) 12 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 incorporating a lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a dispensing abnormality are provided on the upper part of the glass frame 15. On the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 that incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

  In addition, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a ball payout device provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out. There are provided a tray ball outlet 22, a lower plate 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a ball hitting device, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player turns the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device causes the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to be played on the game area 32 (see FIG. 2). Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened is performed in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). Can do. Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case unit 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case unit 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case unit 40. That is, the center case unit 40 surrounds the periphery of the display area R of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display or an EL (Electro Luminescence) display. In an area (display area R) in which an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. The On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

A normal symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 is provided on the left side of the center case unit 40 in the game area 32. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case unit 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case unit 40.
.. Are provided with a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 80) for detecting a game ball won in each of the general winning openings 35.

  In addition, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening) is provided below the center case unit 40 for giving a start condition for the special figure change display game. An ordinary variable winning device (general power) 37 having a pair of movable members 37b, 37b that open and convert to a state in which a game ball can easily flow in and that has a second start winning opening is provided.

The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is normally held in a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state.
Then, when the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 80) as a driving device, and a normal variation prize is won. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a first special variable winning device (large winning mouth) 38 and a second special variable winning device (which can be converted into a state where the game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 39).

The first special variable winning device 38 is disposed below the normal variable winning device 37. The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and a special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game. As a result of the above, the state is converted from the closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) to the open state (state advantageous to the player).
That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning port solenoid 38b (see FIG. 80) as a driving device. By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player.
In addition, a count switch 38a (see FIG. 80) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is disposed in the first special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 (winning area). Has been.
Below the first special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 32a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

The second special variation winning device 39 is disposed on the upper left side of the center case unit 40. The second special variable winning device 39 includes a guide movable member 392 that rotates around the rotation shaft provided on the lower end side so that the upper end side tilts to the left side and can open the big winning opening. Depending on the result of the special-figure display game as an auxiliary game, the winning prize opening is converted from a closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player).
That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes a big prize opening opened and closed by a guide movable member 392 driven by a big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 80) as a driving device, for example, during the special gaming state. By changing the closed state from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the open area and give a predetermined game value (award ball) to the player. .
Here, the guide movable member 392 closes a ball introduction port 391a (described later) and does not accept a game ball flowing down the game area 32, and accepts a game ball flowing down the game area 32 by opening the ball introduction port 391a. A movable member that can be converted into an open state is formed.
In addition, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 80) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is disposed in the second special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 39 (winning area). Has been.

Furthermore, the second special variation winning device 39 can convert between a predetermined first state and a second state, and can emphasize conversion of the guide movable member 392 (movable member) to an open state in the second state. An effect movable member 393 is provided.
The effect movable member 393 is driven by the prize winning solenoid 39b together with the guide movable member 392, and is converted from the first state to the second state as the guide movable member 392 (movable member) is converted from the closed state to the open state. It is configured to be.

Specifically, the guide movable member 392 (movable member) is in a standing posture in the closed state and closes the ball inlet 391a (described later), while in the open state, is in a tilted posture toward the side game area 32. (That is, the upper end side is rotated in the direction of falling to the left side) to open the ball introduction port 391a. On the other hand, the effect movable member 393 is disposed in an internal space P (described later) formed in the second special variation winning device 39 so as to face the guide movable member 392, and is in a standing posture in the first state. In the second state, the tilting posture is directed toward the side opposite to the guide movable member 392 (that is, the upper end side rotates in a direction to tilt to the right side).
In other words, the second special variation prize winning device 39 includes a pair of movable members (a guide movable member 392 and an effect movable member 393) that can be opened in an inverted “C” shape. The guiding movable member 392 guides the game ball to the big prize opening, and the directing movable member 393 out of the pair of movable members does not perform such guidance, and makes it appear as if the big prize opening is wide open. It is comprised so that the production for it may be performed.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (for example, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 that form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for executing a common figure variable display game triggered by winning a prize at one place.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) and a second special figure fluctuation for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display section for display games (special figure 2 display), the fluctuation display section for general figure fluctuation display games (common figure display) composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp And a memory display unit for informing the start memory number of each variable display game.
Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs, and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and turns on when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of the short time state. A second game state display unit (second game state display), a probability state display unit (third game state display) that displays that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. A round display unit is provided for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39).

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, the central segment is displayed. Display blinking drive to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game, and when the result of the game is “win”, the result of out of game (special result mode) is not. A game result is displayed with a result mode other than the result mode (for example, the numbers “3” and “7”) in a lit state.

  The universal display displays the fact that the light is changing by blinking the lamp during the change. When the game result is “out of”, for example, the lamp is turned off, and when the game result is “hit”, the lamp is turned on to display the game result.

The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display. Specifically, when the number of hold is “0”, all four lamps are turned off, and when the number of hold is “1”, only lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of holdings is “2”, the lamps 1 and 2 are turned on. When the number of holdings is “3”, the lamps 1, 2 and 3 are turned on. When the number of holdings is “4”, 4 is set. All the lamps 1 to 4 are turned on.
The special figure 2 hold indicator shows the same as the special figure 1 hold indicator with respect to the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) which is the variation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator. To display.

  The general map hold indicator displays the start memory number (= hold number) of the general map start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general map indicator. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 and 2 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of hold is “2”, lamps 1 and 2 are turned on. When the number of hold is “3”, lamp 1 is blinked, lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of hold is “4”. Lamps 1 and 2 are blinked.

For example, the first game state indicator turns off the lamp in a normal gaming state and turns on the lamp when a big hit has occurred.
For example, the second gaming state indicator turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when the short-time state occurs.

  The probability state display unit turns off the lamp when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, for example, and when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Turns on the lamp.

  For example, the round display unit turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit when the big hit occurs. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 are won, or they flow into the out port 32 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and are discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning apparatus 37, or the special variable winning apparatus 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is paid out. From the dispensing unit controlled by 200 (see FIG. 80), the sheet is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 80) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played.
In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display of the collective display device 50.
In addition, in the normal chart start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining a hit error of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value In addition, a specific result mode (a general map specifying result) is derived by winning the normal map change display game.

The usual map variation display game is executed by a variation display unit (common diagram display) provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general and normal symbols) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information is displayed by blinking this LED. The fluctuation display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the LED is turned on or off to display the result.
Note that, for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like may be used as the normal identification information, which is displayed by variably displaying for a predetermined time and then stopped. If the stop display of the normal map change display game results in the normal map specifying result, it becomes a hit of the normal map, and the pair of movable members 37b of the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is in a predetermined time (for example, if the normal map low probability state). The open state is opened for 0.3 seconds (0.8 seconds in the case of a normal high probability state). This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  When the random number value extracted at the time of detection of the passage to the universal figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure indicator stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, the normal variation winning device 37 is driven by a built-in general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 80), so that the movable member 37b has a predetermined time (for example, 0.3% in the normal low-probability state). The game ball is converted into a state of being released only for 0.8 seconds in the case of the normal high probability state, and the winning of the game ball is allowed.

The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four).
In addition, when the starting winning ball is detected, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted, and the extracted random number value is stored in a special figure memory in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 80). Each area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the memory display section for notification of the start winning number of the collective display device 50 (special figure 1 hold indicator, special figure 2 hold indicator) and the center case unit. Also on the display device 41 of 40, it is displayed as a decoration special figure start memory display m1.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as a start storage means capable of storing a start memory for executing the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition.

The game control device 100 is based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof, the special figure 1 display (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display (variation display device). The first or second special figure variation display game is performed.
The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner on the display device (image display device) 41 corresponding to each special figure variation display game. It has come to be.
As a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state (so-called, Big hit state). Correspondingly, the display mode (stop result mode) of the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  For example, in the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41, first, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is displayed as the left variation display area (first special symbol n1) and the right variation display area (second variation). In each of the special symbol n2) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol n3), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game by the stop result mode constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

Note that the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the special game variable display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the game machine 10 with the special map 1 display and the special map 2 display.
Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is supposed to be executed.

In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one.
On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. When the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in a special state or in a special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory.
In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning award port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the general winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 38a. , 39a includes a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Has been. Further, the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like are micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the detailed structure of the game board 30 having the above configuration will be described.
FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 30 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 3, an opening corresponding to the outer shape of the center case unit (front surface component) 40 is provided in the game board 30 (specifically, the game board 30 main body constituted by a wooden plywood board, an acrylic board, or the like). 30a is formed, and the center case unit 40 is attached to the opening 30a from the front of the game board 30 main body.
The game board 30 is also equipped with a normal start gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, a first special variable winning device 38, and the like.

In addition, on the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 30 main body, the effect mechanism unit (back surface component) 1000 disposed mainly behind the center case unit 40 and the effect mechanism unit 1000 are disposed below. The ball flow downstream unit 900 is mounted.
The ball flow lower path unit 900 has a game ball that has won a prize in the general prize opening 35, the start prize opening 36, the normal variation prize winning device 37, the first special variation prize winning device 38, and the second special variable prize winning device 39 below the game board 30. It is a unit that guides.
The effect mechanism unit 1000 is a unit that executes a game effect, and an effect control unit 500 including a display device 41 and the like is mounted on the rear surface of the effect mechanism unit 1000.

FIG. 4 shows a detailed structure of the effect control unit 500. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the effect control unit 500 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control unit 500 mainly includes a display unit 502 including the display device 41 and the like, and an effect control device 300 and a relay board holder 501 mounted on the rear surface of the display unit 502. Is done.
The relay board holder 501 relays signals (commands and data) from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and relays signals (commands and data) from the effect control device 300 to the decoration device and effect device. A relay board or the like is built in.

The display unit 502 mainly includes a rectangular display device 41, a rectangular clear (protection) cover 503 for protecting the display surface of the display device 41, and a rear opening concave chamber shape that covers the display device 41 from the front. The first case member 510 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view (substantially rectangular shape in the left-right direction) and a front opening in a concave shape covering the display device 41 from the rear is substantially rectangular in shape (long in the left-right direction). And a second case member 520 having a substantially rectangular shape. That is, the display device 41 is stored in a storage case 504 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape including the first case member 510 and the second case member 520.
Here, the display device 41 forms a display panel capable of displaying an image according to the progress of the game, and the gaming machine 10 includes a storage case 504 for storing the display device 41. The storage case 504 includes a first case member 510 that covers the display device 41 from one side (front side (front side in the case of this embodiment)) and the other side of the display device 41 (back side in the case of this embodiment). (Rear side)) and a second case member 520.

5 and 6 show the detailed structure of the first case member 510. FIG. 5A is a perspective view of the first case member 510 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 5B is a perspective view of the first case member 510 viewed from the rear side. 6A is a perspective view of the upper left portion of the first case member 510 as viewed from the rear surface side, and FIG. 6B is a lower left side of the first case member 510 as viewed from the rear surface side. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the first case member 510 has a rectangular shape as an opening for exposing the display surface (display region R) of the display device 41 stored in the storage case 504. The display window 510a is formed. Further, the first case member 510 is formed with a cover mounting step 510b for mounting the clear cover 503 on the front surface side, and a panel housing recess 510c for housing the display device 41 on the rear surface side. ing.

The cover mounting step portion 510b is a step portion that is provided around the display window portion 510a and is one step lower than the front surface of the first case member 510. As shown in FIG. One side portion (in the case of the present embodiment, the right edge portion of the display window portion 510a) is formed in a U shape.
Further, the front surface of the first case member 510 (the front edge of the cover mounting step portion 510b) is substantially in contact with the front end portion of the clear cover 503 attached to the cover mounting step portion 510b so that the clear cover 503 is moved forward. A cover support piece 511 for supporting from above is projected.
Therefore, when the clear cover 503 is slid from one side portion of the cover attachment step portion 510b toward the other side portion, the clear cover 503 is attached to the cover attachment step portion 510b while being supported by the cover support piece 511.

Further, the open end of the cover mounting step 510b is in contact with one side (right side) of the clear cover 503 attached to the cover mounting step 510b so that the clear cover 503 is detached from the cover mounting step 510b. A protrusion 512 is provided to prevent the protrusion.
By doing in this way, the movement of the clear cover 503 in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction is restricted by the cover support piece 511 and the projection 512, and rattling of the clear cover 503 attached to the cover attachment step portion 510b is suppressed. be able to.
The numbers of the cover support pieces 511 and the protrusions 512 are not limited to the illustrated examples, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the upper surface of the first case member 510 is elastically deformable in the vertical direction with the base end as a fulcrum, and the case engagement receiving portion 521 of the second case member 520. Upper case engaging pieces 513 that can be engaged with (described later) are provided at three locations in a state of being separated in the left-right direction. The number of upper case engagement pieces 513 is not limited to the illustrated example, and may be less than or greater than three.
The upper case engaging piece 513 is formed on the first case member 510 such that the base end portion of the upper case engaging piece 513 faces the upper end (upper end surface) of the display device 41 accommodated in the panel accommodating recess 510c. It is formed by making a cut in the upper surface portion. Further, the upper case engaging piece 513 is arranged on the rear side (second case) so that the front end portion of the upper case engaging piece 513 is located on the rear side of the rear surface of the display device 41 accommodated in the panel accommodating recess 510c. It extends toward the member 520 side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 5B and 6A, the front end portion of the upper case engagement piece 513 can be engaged with a case engagement receiving portion 521 (described later) of the second case member 520. An upper case engaging claw portion 513a protrudes upward. When the upper case engaging claw 513a and the case engaging receiving portion 521 are engaged, the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are combined, that is, the first case member 510 and the second case member 521 are combined. It is comprised so that a closed state with case member 520 can be maintained.
That is, the upper case engagement piece 513 is engaged with a case engagement receiving portion 521 (engagement receiving portion) provided on the second case member 520 to close the first case member 510 and the second case member 520. An elastic engagement piece for maintaining the state is formed. The upper case engaging piece 513 is extended from the position corresponding to the other end (the upper end in the present embodiment) of the display device 41 (display panel) toward the second case member 520. .
Further, the upper case engagement claw portion 513a is disposed on the second case member 520 side with respect to the display device 41, and can be engaged with the case engagement receiving portion 521 by the elastic restoring force of the upper case engagement piece 513. Make a case engaging claw.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the lower surface portion of the first case member 510 is elastically deformable in the vertical direction with the base end portion as a fulcrum, and the case engagement receiving portion 521 of the second case member 520 (described later). ) And the lower case engagement piece 514 that can be engaged with each other is provided at only one location in the approximate center in the left-right direction. The number of lower case engagement pieces 514 is not limited to the illustrated example, and a plurality of lower case engagement pieces 514 may be provided apart from each other.
The lower case engaging piece 514 is a first case member so that the base end portion of the lower case engaging piece 514 faces the lower end (lower end surface) of the display device 41 accommodated in the panel accommodating recess 510c. It is formed by making a cut in the lower surface portion of 510. Further, the lower case engagement piece 514 is arranged on the rear side (the first side) so that the front end portion of the lower case engagement piece 514 is located on the rear side of the rear surface of the display device 41 accommodated in the panel accommodation recess 510c. 2 case member 520 side).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 5B, the lower case engagement that can be engaged with a case engagement receiving portion 521 (described later) of the second case member 520 is provided at the tip of the lower case engagement piece 514. The nail | claw part 514a is protrudingly provided toward the downward side. When the lower case engagement claw portion 514a and the case engagement receiving portion 521 are engaged, the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are combined, that is, the first case member 510 and the first case member It is comprised so that the 2nd case member 520 and a closed state can be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5B and 6B, the lower portion of the inner surface of the first case member 510 has a lower end portion (lower end surface) of the display device 41 accommodated in the panel accommodating recess 510c. A lower restricting piece (abutting portion) 515 for substantially abutting and supporting the display device 41 from below is projected upward. That is, the lower restricting piece 515 is in contact with one end of the display device 41 (display panel) (lower end in the case of the present embodiment) to form a panel contact portion for restricting movement of the display device 41.
Note that the number of the lower regulating pieces 515 is not limited to the illustrated example, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

Here, as shown in FIG. 6A, the upper end portion of the upper case engaging piece 513 is substantially in contact with the upper end portion (upper end surface) of the display device 41 housed in the panel housing recess 510 c, and A panel pressing portion 513b for pressing the display device 41 against the lower regulating piece 515 is provided so as to protrude downward. That is, the panel pressing portion 513b is connected to the display device 41 (display panel) in a state where the upper case engagement claw portion 513a (case engagement claw portion) is engaged with the case engagement reception portion 521 (engagement reception portion). The end portion (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper end portion) is configured to be able to be pressed toward the lower regulating piece 515 (panel contact portion) side.
On the other hand, since the lower case engagement piece 514 is separated from the lower end portion of the display device 41 so as not to receive the weight of the display device 41, such a panel pressing portion is not provided. That is, the lower case engagement piece 514 is different from the upper case engagement piece 513 only in that it does not include a panel pressing portion, and the other points are substantially the same as the upper case engagement piece 513 and have a mirror image relationship. Yes.

As shown in FIGS. 5B and 6A, 6B, either one of the left side portion and the right side portion of the inner surface of the first case member 510 (the left side portion in the case of the present embodiment) Display substantially in contact with either one of the left end (left end face) and the right end (right end face) of the display device 41 accommodated in the panel accommodating recess 510c (in this embodiment, the left end). A side regulating piece (abutting portion) 516 for supporting the device 41 from the side (in the case of the present embodiment, the left side) protrudes. In other words, the side regulating piece 516 is in contact with one side end of the display device 41 (display panel) (the left side end in the case of the present embodiment) and can control the movement of the display device 41. Makes the end contact part.
Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the display device 41 is provided in the panel housing recess 510 c on either the left side or the right side of the inner surface of the first case member 510 (the right side in the present embodiment). A housing support piece 517 is provided as a guide for housing the housing.
In addition, the number of the side part regulation pieces 516 and the accommodation support pieces 517 is not limited to the illustrated example, and can be arbitrarily arbitrarily changed.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 5B, 6A, and 6B, the left and right sides of the panel receiving recess 510c are provided integrally (in communication) with the panel receiving recess 510c. Space portions (including the entry empty portion 510d) are provided. In the case of this embodiment, two of the four side restricting pieces 516 (two on the upper and lower sides) are formed on the left end of the panel receiving recess 510c, while the remaining two (on the upper and lower inner sides) Are formed from the space provided on the left side of the panel housing recess 510c to the left end of the panel housing recess 510c. In the case of this embodiment, three of the four accommodation support pieces 517 (one of the two on the upper and lower outer sides and the two on the upper and lower inner sides) are formed at the right end of the panel accommodation recess 510c. On the other hand, the remaining one (the other of the two upper and lower inner sides) is formed from the space provided on the right side of the panel receiving recess 510c to the right end of the panel receiving recess 510c. In addition, the space part (space part provided in the right side of the panel accommodation recessed part 510c in the case of this embodiment) on the opposite side to the side in which the side part control piece 516 was provided is the panel press piece of the 2nd case member 520. 524 (which will be described later) is an approaching empty space 510d.

7 and 8 show the detailed structure of the second case member 520. FIG. 7A is a perspective view of the second case member 520 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 7B is a perspective view of the second case member 520 viewed from the rear side. FIG. 8A is a perspective view of the upper side of the second case member 520 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 8B is the lower side of the right side of the second case member 520 as viewed from the front side. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the position corresponding to the upper case engaging piece 513 of the first case member 510 among the upper end portion of the second case member 520 and the lower end portion of the second case member 520. A case engagement receiving portion 521 that can be engaged with the case engagement pieces 513 and 514 is provided at a position corresponding to the lower case engagement piece 514 of the first case member 510. The case engagement receiving portion 521 includes a through hole through which case engagement claw portions 513a and 514a provided at the distal end portions of the case engagement pieces 513 and 514 can be inserted in the front-rear direction.

When the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are brought close together in order to unite the first case member 510 and the second case member 520, first, the upper case engaging piece 513 and the lower case engaging piece 513 of the first case member 510 The tip of the side case engaging piece 514 comes into contact with the case engaging receiving portion 521 of the second case member 520.
Since the upper case engagement piece 513 has an inclined surface whose degree of protrusion gradually decreases toward the distal end side (rear side), the case engagement receiving portion 521 extends along the inclined surface. The engaging piece 513 is deformed downward. Accordingly, the upper case engagement claw portion 513a is inserted into the through hole of the case engagement receiving portion 521. Thereafter, when the upper case engagement claw 513a passes through the through hole, the upper case engagement piece 513 is substantially restored to the original state by the elastic restoring force, and the upper case engagement claw 513a is restored to the case engagement receiving portion 521. Engage with. When the upper case engagement claw portion 513a engages with the case engagement receiving portion 521, the upper case engagement piece 513 does not completely return to the original state by the elastic restoring force, but the case engagement reception portion. It is pressed by the part 521 and is slightly deformed in the downward direction (that is, the case engagement receiving part 521 resists the elastic restoring force of the upper case engagement piece 513 and moves the upper case engagement piece 513. Since it is slightly deformed in the downward direction), “substantially return” is used here.
That is, the upper case engagement claw portion 513a (case engagement claw portion) is separated from the lower regulation piece 515 (panel contact portion) by the elastic restoring force of the upper case engagement piece 513 (in this embodiment, The case engagement receiving portion 521 is engaged with the case engagement receiving portion 521 by moving in the upward direction, and the case engagement receiving portion 521 resists the elastic restoring force of the upper case engagement piece 513. It is configured to engage with the upper case engaging claw portion 513a.

  On the other hand, the lower case engagement piece 514 also has an inclined surface whose degree of protrusion gradually decreases toward the distal end side (rear side), so that the case engagement receiving portion 521 is lowered along the inclined surface. The side case engaging piece 514 is deformed upward. Accordingly, the lower case engagement claw portion 514a is inserted into the through hole of the case engagement receiving portion 521. Thereafter, when the lower case engagement claw 514a passes through the through hole, the lower case engagement piece 514 is substantially restored to the original state by the elastic restoring force, and the lower case engagement claw 514a is engaged with the case. Engage with the receiving portion 521. When the lower case engagement claw portion 514a engages with the case engagement receiving portion 521, the lower case engagement piece 514 is completely restored to its original state by the elastic restoring force similarly to the upper case engagement piece 513. Is not pressed back by the case engagement receiving portion 521 and is slightly deformed upward, but has no function of pressing the display device 41 like the upper case engagement piece 513 ( Since the panel pressing portion is not provided), it may be configured to return completely without leaving an elastic restoring force.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 7A, 8A, and 8B, the second case member 520 substantially contacts the back surface (rear surface) of the display device 41 stored in the storage case 504. A back support piece 522 and a panel contact step 523 for pressing the display device 41 against the first case member 510 are provided. The numbers of the back support pieces 522 and the panel contact step portions 523 are not limited to the illustrated example, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
In addition, a reinforcing rib 525 for reinforcing the second case member 520 is stretched over the inner surface of the second case member 520.

Further, on the inner surface of the second case member 520, either the left end (left end surface) or the right end (right end surface) of the display device 41 stored in the storage case 504 is the other (in the case of the present embodiment). , A panel pressing piece 524 that protrudes substantially toward the rear side and presses the display device 41 against the side regulating piece 516 of the first case member 510. That is, the panel pressing piece 524 abuts on the other side end portion (in the case of the present embodiment, the right end portion) of the display device 41 (display panel) to cause the display device 41 to contact the side portion regulating piece 516 (side end abutment). Part) an elastic pressing piece that can be pressed toward the side. Specifically, the panel pressing piece 524 is configured to abut on the other end (right end) of the display device 41 when the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are closed. ing.
The number of panel pressing pieces 524 is not limited to the illustrated example, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the rear surface of the second case member 520 is an area for attaching the board box attachment portion 520a, which is an area for attaching the effect control device 300, and an intermediate board holder 501. A certain substrate holder mounting portion 520b is provided.
And the box engaging part which can be engaged with the engagement piece 300a (refer FIG. 4) protrudingly provided by the outer surface of the production | presentation control apparatus 300 in the circumference | surroundings of the board | substrate box attachment part 520a among the rear surfaces of the 2nd case member 520. 526 is provided.

The box engagement portion 526 has an insertion port 526a into which the engagement piece 300a of the effect control device 300 can be inserted from the rear, and the engagement piece 300a is inserted from the insertion port 526a and has a predetermined engagement direction ( In the case of the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to engage with the engaging piece 300a when slid in the left direction.
By the way, when the engagement piece 300a engaged with the box engagement portion 526 slides in a direction opposite to the engagement direction (right direction in this embodiment), the box engagement portion 526 and the engagement piece The engagement with 300a is released. Therefore, the second case member 520 is provided with a board box engaging piece 527 for restricting removal of the effect control device 300 attached to the second case member 520.

The board box engaging piece 527 is configured to be elastically deformable in the front-rear direction with the base end as a fulcrum. Then, at the front end portion of the board box engaging piece 527, the side surface of the effect control device 300 attached to the correct position (that is, the board box attachment portion 520a) of the rear surface of the second case member 520 (in the case of this embodiment). , A right side surface) is provided.
When the engagement piece 300a of the effect control device 300 is inserted into the insertion port 526a of the box engagement portion 526, the effect control device 300 presses the claw portion of the substrate box engagement piece 527 and the substrate box engagement piece. 527 is deformed forward. In this state, when the effect control device 300 is slid in the engagement direction (left direction), the box engaging portion 526 and the engagement piece 300a are engaged, and the effect control device 300 performs the board box engagement. The pressure on the claw portion of the combined piece 527 is released and the board box engaging piece 527 returns to its original state, and the claw portion of the board box engaging piece 527 engages with the side surface (right side surface) of the effect control device 300. It will be in the state. As a result, even if the effect control device 300 is slid in the direction (right direction) for releasing the engagement between the box engagement portion 526 and the engagement piece 300a, the claw portion of the board box engagement piece 527 is obstructed. Since the slide movement becomes difficult, the production control device 300 cannot be easily detached from the second case member 520.

Next, a method for assembling the display unit 502 and a method for fixing the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the display unit 502 viewed from the rear side.
FIG. 10A is a perspective view of the upper side of the left part of the first case member 510 in a state in which the display device 41 is accommodated in the panel accommodating recess 510c, as viewed from the rear side, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower part right side of the 1st case member 510 of the state in which the display apparatus 41 was accommodated in the panel accommodation recessed part 510c from the rear surface side.
FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the upper left side of the display unit 502 as viewed from the rear side.
FIG. 12 is a front view of the display unit 502.
13A is a diagram showing the upper side of the cross section along the line AA in FIG. 12, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the lower side of the cross section along the line AA in FIG. .
14A is a diagram showing the right side of the cross section along the line BB in FIG. 12, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing the left side of the cross section along the line BB in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 10 (a), and 10 (b), the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are housed in the panel housing recess 510 c of the first case member 510 when the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are not combined. The display device 41 is placed on the lower restriction piece 515 of the first case member 510, that is, the lower end portion (lower end surface) of the display device 41 is substantially in contact with the lower restriction piece 515. Further, the display device 41 has an upper end portion (upper end surface) substantially in contact with the panel pressing portion 513 b of the upper case engaging piece 513 of the first case member 510. However, the display device 41 is sandwiched between the upper case engaging piece 513 and the lower regulating piece 515 in the vertical direction. However, since the upper case engaging piece 513 can be elastically deformed in the vertical direction, the first case member In the state where 510 and the second case member 520 are not combined, the backlash in the vertical direction is not completely suppressed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, the display device 41 has one side end portion (in the case of the present embodiment, the left end portion (left end surface)) substantially the same as the side regulating piece 516 of the first case member 510. In contrast to this, as shown in FIG. 10B, the other side end portion (in the case of the present embodiment, the right end portion (right end surface)) is separated from the accommodation support piece 517 of the first case member 510. doing. Therefore, in the state where the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are not combined, the display device 41 is in a state in which rattling in the left-right direction is not suppressed.

When the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are brought close together in order to unite the first case member 510 and the second case member 520, the tips of the case engaging pieces 513 and 514 of the first case member 510 are moved. The case engagement receiving portion 521 of the second case member 520 comes into contact.
When the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are further brought closer, the case engagement receiving portion 521 deforms the case engagement pieces 513 and 514 along the inclined surfaces of the case engagement claw portions 513a and 514a. I will let you. Specifically, the upper case engaging piece 513 is deformed downward, and the lower case engaging piece 514 is deformed upward. As a result, the case engagement claw portions 513a and 514a are inserted into the through holes of the case engagement receiving portion 521. Then, when the case engagement claw portions 513a and 514a pass through the through holes of the case engagement receiving portion 521, the case engagement pieces 513 and 514 substantially return to the original state, for example, as shown in FIG. Case engagement claw portions 513 a and 514 a engage with case engagement receiving portion 521. Thereby, the united state of the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 can be maintained.

In this embodiment, in order to assist in maintaining the combined state of the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 due to the engagement between the case engagement pieces 513 and 514 and the case engagement receiving portion 521, screws are used. It is configured to stop.
Specifically, the second case member 520 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 520c (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) penetrating in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, a cylindrical mounting boss 510e (see FIG. 5B) along the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the screw hole 520c on the inner surface of the first case member 510. Then, in a state where the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are combined, a screw (not shown) is inserted from the rear of the second case member 520 through the screw hole 520c of the second case member 520. The second case member 520 can be fixed to the first case member 510 by being inserted into the mounting boss 510e of 510.

  The end portion of the first case member 510 is provided with a plurality of fastening portions 510f (see FIGS. 5A and 5B) having screw holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the second case member A plurality of fastening portions 520d (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) having screw holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the outer surface of 520. On the other hand, a screw receiving portion into which a screw can be inserted from the rear is provided at a position corresponding to the screw hole of the fastening portions 510f and 520d on the rear surface of the rendering mechanism unit 1000. Then, with the effect control unit 500 arranged behind the effect mechanism unit 1000, screws (not shown) are inserted from the rear of the effect control unit 500 into the screw holes of the fastening portion 510f of the first case member 510 and the second case member. The effect control unit 500 can be fixed to the rear surface of the effect mechanism unit 1000 by being inserted into the screw receiving portion of the effect mechanism unit 1000 through the screw hole of the fastening portion 520d of 520.

  Here, as described above, the upper case engagement claw portion 513a of the upper case engagement piece 513 and the case engagement receiving portion 521 are engaged (that is, the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 The upper case engaging piece 513 is not completely restored to its original state by the elastic restoring force, but is pressed by the case engaging receiving portion 521 and slightly deformed downward. It has become. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the state where the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are combined, the upper case engagement claw portion 513a and the case engagement receiving portion 521 are displayed. Since the upper case engaging piece 513 is engaged at a position behind the rear surface of the device 41, the upper case engaging piece 513 is bent so that the tip of the upper case engaging piece 513 is located slightly below the original state. It is. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13B, the display device 41 is pressed against the lower regulating piece 515 of the first case member 510 by the panel pressing portion 513b of the upper case engaging piece 513. Shaking in the vertical direction is suppressed.

  In this way, in the state where the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are combined, the upper case engaging piece 513 is bent (deformed downward) and the lower case engaging piece. Since 514 is bent (deformed upward), the second case member 520 is directed toward the first case member 510 by the elastic restoring force of the upper case engaging piece 513 and the lower case engaging piece 514. Gravitate. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the display device 41 is pressed against the first case member 510 by the back support piece 522 of the second case member 520 and the panel contact step 523. Further, rattling in the front-rear direction of the display device 41 is suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14A, in the state where the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are combined, the panel pressing piece 524 of the second case member 520 is free of the first case member 510 from entering. It enters the portion 510d and substantially abuts on the side end surface of the display device 41 (in the present embodiment, the right end surface). Specifically, the panel pressing piece 524 has a panel pressing portion 524a that protrudes toward the display device 41 at the tip, and when the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are combined, The pressing portion 524a is substantially in contact with the display device 41, and the panel pressing portion 524a is located slightly on the side opposite to the display device 41 side (right side in the case of this embodiment) than the original state. That is, in the state where the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are combined, the panel pressing piece 524 is bent (deformed in the right direction). As a result, as shown in FIG. 14B, the display device 41 is pressed against the side regulating piece 516 of the first case member 510 by the panel pressing piece 524. Is suppressed.

In this way, conventional operations (specifically, operations such as fixing the support plate to the fixing portion (screw hole) provided in the display device and fixing the support plate in the storage case) Even if it does not perform, the display case 41 is housed in the panel housing recess 510c of the first case member 510, and the housing case can be obtained simply by combining the first case member 510 and the second case member 520. The display device 41 can be stored in the 504.
Further, when the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are combined, the display device 41 is in a state in which backlash in the vertical direction, the front-rear direction, and the left-right direction is suppressed. The display device 41 is securely fixed in the storage case 504 by a simple operation of housing the display device 41 in the panel housing recess 510c and combining the first case member 510 and the second case member 520. Is possible.
Further, since the display device is not screwed to the storage case via the support plate or the like (or directly), the display device 41 can be easily moved from the storage case 504 when the display device 41 is replaced or recycled. It can be taken out.

It should be noted that the panel pressing piece 524 has a longer protruding length, and the panel pressing piece 524 is provided with case engaging claws such as case engaging claws 513a and 514a of the case engaging pieces 513 and 514. It is also possible to provide a case engagement receiving portion such as the case engagement receiving portion 521 of the second case member 520 at a position corresponding to the panel pressing piece 524 in the one case member 510. That is, the panel pressing piece 524 of the second case member 520 abuts on the other side end of the display device 41 (display panel) and directs the display device 41 toward the side portion regulating piece 516 (side end abutting portion). The first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are engaged with each other by an elastic pressing piece that can be pressed and a case engagement receiving portion (engagement receiving portion) provided on the first case member 510. It is also possible to constitute both the elastic engagement piece for maintaining the closed state.
In this case, the panel pressing piece 524 (elastic pressing piece) also functions as an elastic engagement piece (that is, the united state of the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 can be maintained by the panel pressing piece 524). The first case member 510 may or may not be provided with the upper case engaging piece 513 and the lower case engaging piece 514, or the upper case engaging piece 513 and the lower case engaging piece 514. Only one of them may be provided.

  Further, when the elastic pressing piece (panel pressing piece 524) is provided on the second case member 520, the side portion of the display device 41 is regulated by the elastic pressing piece, rather than when the elastic pressing piece is provided on the first case member 510. When pressing toward the piece 516 side, the elastic pressing piece is easily bent. In this embodiment, the elastic pressing piece is provided on the second case member 520 because the elastic pressing piece is more easily bent, but the first case member 510 is not limited thereto. You may comprise so that an elastic press piece may be provided in this. When the first case member 510 is provided with an elastic pressing piece, the elastic pressing piece is configured to function as an elastic engaging piece (specifically, the elastic pressing piece is configured to be provided with a case engaging claw portion). ), A case engagement receiving portion (engagement receiving portion) is provided at a position corresponding to the elastic pressing piece in the second case member 520.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the upper case engaging piece 513 (elastic engaging piece) protrudes toward the lower regulating piece 515 (panel abutting portion) side to display the display device 41 (display panel). ) May be configured to include a panel engagement claw portion 518 that engages from the front and back other side (in the case of the present embodiment, from the back side (rear side)).
Thereby, even in the state where the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are not combined, the back and forth rattling of the display device 41 is suppressed. Therefore, for example, even when the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are combined in a state where the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are erected, the first case member 510 may be combined before the combination. Since the display device 41 housed in the panel housing recess 510c does not wobble or fall over, the storage efficiency of the display device 41 in the storage case 504 is further improved.

Moreover, as shown in FIG.15 (b), it comprises so that the 1st case member 510 may be equipped with the press auxiliary | assistant part 519 which assists the press of the display apparatus 41 (display panel) by the panel press piece 524 (elastic press piece). It is also possible. The pressing assist portion 519 is a guide surface (inclined) for guiding (pressing) the tip end portion of the panel pressing piece 524 that has entered the entry space portion 510d toward the display device 41 that is accommodated in the panel accommodating recess 510c. Surface) and when the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are in the closed state, from the side opposite to the other end of the display device 41 (in the present embodiment, the right end). The panel pressing piece 524 is configured to abut.
Accordingly, the display device 41 can be reliably pressed to the side portion regulating piece 516 side of the first case member 510 by the panel pressing piece 524, and the display device 41 can be accurately fixed in the storage case 504. It becomes possible.

FIG. 16 shows a detailed structure of a center case unit (enclosure frame) 40 that constitutes a front structural member. FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the center case unit 40 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 16, the center case unit 40 mainly includes a frame member 440 having a frame shape in which an opening 440a is formed, a partition wall member 450 attached to the lower part of the frame member 440 from the rear, and a partition A decorative lens member 460 mounted on the rear surface of the wall member 450, a left light emitting unit 461 and a right light emitting unit 462 mounted on the rear surface of the decorative lens member 460, and a second mounted on the upper left side of the frame member 440 from the front. Special variation winning device 39, a winning ball passage member 470 attached to the left part of the frame member 440 from the rear, an upper stage unit 600 attached to the upper part of the frame member 440 from the rear, and a right part of the frame member 440 And a side effect unit 700 mounted from behind.
In addition, the display device provided in the effect control unit 500 disposed behind the opening 40a (see FIG. 3) of the center case unit 40, that is, the center case unit 40, based on the opening 440a of the frame member 440. An opening for exposing the display surface 41 (display region R) is formed.

The frame member 440 is provided with a stage 441 at the lower part thereof that causes the game ball to roll and then flow down below the center case unit 40.
The stage 441 is provided substantially in the center of the stage 441 and guides a rolling game ball to the rear, and a position above the start winning opening 36 in the front surface of the stage 441 (this embodiment) In the case of the embodiment, it has a guide outlet 441b that is provided on the front surface of the stage 441 and that opens toward the outside of the center case unit 40.

  The partition wall member 450 is a member that partitions an area where the game ball rolls on the stage 441 and the opening 40a of the center case unit 40, and mainly the stage 441 with an interval at which the game ball can roll at least. And a rear wall portion 452 provided so as to hang from the rear end portion of the flange portion 451 so as to cover the rear surface of the stage 441. . The back wall 452 is provided with a guide channel 452 a that allows a game ball rolling on the stage 441 to flow down to the center case unit 40.

  The guide channel 452a is a channel formed by denting the back wall 452 backward so as to connect the guide unit 441a and the guide outlet 441b, and rolls on the stage 441 to guide the guide unit 441a. The game ball guided rearward by 441a is introduced and can be guided directly above the start winning port 36 outside the center case unit 40 through a guide outlet port 441b opened on the front surface of the center case unit 40. Yes.

In addition, the frame member 440 includes a warp device 442 that can guide a game ball flowing down the game area 32 onto the stage 441 on the left side.
The warp device 442 is provided on the upper left side of the frame member 440 and opens toward the outside of the center case unit 40. The warp device 442 is provided on the lower left side of the frame member 440. Are provided with a warp outlet 442b that opens toward the stage 441 and the flange 451) and a flow path (not shown) that connects the warp inlet 442a and the warp outlet 442b. That is, the warp device 442 moves the game ball flowing down the game area 32 and flowing into the warp inlet 442a onto the stage 441 inside the center case unit 40 (ball) via the warp outlet 442b opened inside the center case unit 40. It can be guided to the rolling part).

The decorative lens member 460 is made of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light, and the front surface of the decorative lens member 460 is decorated by uneven processing or the like.
Further, the left light emitting unit 461 attached to the left rear portion of the decorative lens member 460 and the right light emitting unit 462 attached to the right rear portion of the decorative lens member 460 are light sources (in the case of the present embodiment, LEDs). And is configured to be able to irradiate light from behind the decorative lens member 460.
In the present embodiment, the partition wall member 450 is also formed of a light-transmitting material. 450 can be shown.

The winning ball passage member 470 is a member for guiding the game ball that has won the second special variation winning device 39 to the ball flow lower path unit 900 (see FIG. 3).
As shown in FIG. 2, when viewed from the front, the winning ball passage member 470 is viewed from the opening 40a of the center case unit 40, and the winning ball passage member 470 is formed of a translucent material. The game ball passing through the winning ball passage member 470 can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine 10.

  17 to 20 show the detailed structure of the second special variable winning device 39. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the second special variation winning device 39 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the rear part of the second special variable winning device 39 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the front portion of the second special variable winning device 39 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the front portion of the second special variable winning device 39 as viewed from the rear side. FIG.

The second special variation winning device 39 has a concave shape in the front opening and has a substantially circular shape in front view, and the guide movable member 392 and the effect movable member 393 are disposed in the internal space P thereof.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17, the second special variation winning device 39 is mainly attached to the base member 390 from the front, and a base member 390 having a concave shape in the rear opening and a substantially circular shape in front view. An area partitioning member 391 that defines an internal space P on the front surface side of the base member 390, a guide movable member 392 that is disposed in the internal space P and is rotatable in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the left side, and disposed in the internal space P The second movable member is mounted on the base member 390 from the front so as to cover the lower half of the effect movable member 393, the guide movable member 392, and the effect movable member 393 from the front. A front decoration member 394 that decorates the front surface of the winning device 39, an LED board 395 that is attached to the rear side of the base member 390, and a guide member that is attached to the base member 390 from behind the LED board 395. 96, a count switch (ball detection sensor) 39a disposed below the guide member 396, a mechanism base member 397 mounted on the base member 390 from behind the guide member 396, and a mechanism base member 397. A large winning opening solenoid 39b, and a link member 398 and a movable arm member 399 for connecting the large winning opening solenoid 39b to the guide movable member 392 and the effect movable member 393.

As shown in FIG. 18, the count switch 39a includes a through-hole through which a game ball can pass as the detection unit 39a1, and is configured to detect a game ball that passes through the detection unit 39a1. The count switch 39a is housed in the second special variation prize winning device 39 in a state of being housed in a sensor housing portion 397a provided at the lower portion of the mechanism base member 397 so that the penetrating direction of the detecting portion 39a1 is the vertical direction. ing.
The big prize opening solenoid 39b is accommodated in a solenoid accommodation part 397b provided at the rear of the mechanism base member 397 so that the direction of linear movement of the plunger 39b1 of the special prize opening solenoid 39b is the left-right direction. Therefore, it is built in the second special variable winning device 39.

  The guide member 396 includes a winning ball guide portion 396a having a substantially rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, and a guide portion 396b having a substantially arc shape when viewed from the side that protrudes upward from the rear portion of the winning ball guide portion 396a. The The guide member 396 can guide a game ball that has rolled on a ball rolling surface 390b1 (described later) of the base member 390 to the winning ball guide portion 396a by the guide portion 396b, and the guiding portion is guided by the winning ball guide portion 396a. In a state where the game ball guided by 396b is stored in the guide member storage portion 397c provided at the front portion of the mechanism base member 397 so that the game ball can be guided to the detection portion 39a1 of the count switch 39a, the second special It is built in the variable winning device 39.

The link member 398 is rotatable with respect to the guide member 396 and the mechanism base member 397.
Specifically, the link member 398 has a columnar shape, and has a rotation shaft pin 398 a penetrating along the height direction of the link member 398. That is, one end portion of the rotation shaft pin 398a protrudes from one bottom surface of the link member 398, and the other end portion of the rotation shaft pin 398a protrudes from the other bottom surface. On the other hand, in the inside of the mechanism base member 397 (in the case of the present embodiment, the left side of the guide member accommodating portion 397c in the inside of the mechanism base member 397), a bearing capable of inserting the tip end portion of the rotating shaft pin 398a from the front. A portion 397d protrudes toward the front side, and at the rear portion of the guide member 396 (in the case of the present embodiment, on the left side of the guide portion 396b in the rear portion of the guide member 396), the tip of the rotation shaft pin 398a The bearing part (illustration omitted) which can insert a part from back is protrudingly provided toward the back side. That is, the link member 398 inserts one end portion of the rotating shaft pin 398a into the bearing portion of the guide member 396 and the other end portion as a mechanism in a state where the height direction of the link member 398 is the front-rear direction. By being inserted into the bearing portion 397 d of the base member 397, the guide member 396 and the mechanism base member 397 are pivotally supported (mounted). Thereby, the link member 398 is rotatable with respect to the guide member 396 and the mechanism base member 397.

Also, a plunger engagement receiving portion for engaging with the plunger 39b1 of the big prize opening solenoid 39b at the upper part of the link member 398 (that is, at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft (rotation shaft pin 398a) of the link member 398). As 398b, a groove portion extending in the height direction (that is, the front-rear direction) of the link member 398 is provided.
Further, of the side surface of the link member 398 (in the case of the present embodiment, the side surface of the link member 398 (that is, the position eccentric from the rotating shaft (rotating shaft pin 398a) of the link member 398) than the plunger engagement receiving portion 398b On the right side), as an arm engagement piece 398c for engaging with the movable arm member 399, a protrusion protruding toward the front side is provided.

The base member 390 is formed of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light, and includes a substantially disk-shaped bottom surface portion and a side surface portion that protrudes rearward from the peripheral end portion of the bottom surface portion. Composed.
As shown in FIG. 19, a winning opening 390 a through which a game ball that has flowed into the internal space P passes is formed at a substantially central portion of the bottom surface of the base member 390.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20, a lens cut is formed on the bottom portion of the inner surface of the base member 390 (that is, the rear surface of the bottom surface portion of the base member 390), and from the periphery of the winning opening 390a toward the rear side. A protruding wall portion 390b is provided. The protruding wall portion 390b is provided with a ball rolling surface 390b1 on which a game ball that has passed through the winning opening 390a rolls, and an arm bearing portion 390b2 for engaging with the movable arm member 399.

The region partition member 391 is formed of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light, and includes a base housing portion for housing the base member 390, and a partition member main body that protrudes from the base housing portion toward the front side. It is configured with. The region partitioning member 391 may be configured not to transmit light (or to hardly transmit light).
As shown in FIG. 19, the partition member main body of the region partition member 391 has a shape that is formed in a substantially “C” shape by curving a strip-shaped material having a predetermined thickness in the length direction (longitudinal direction). I am doing. A gap between both end portions of the partition member main body serves as an entrance of a game ball into the internal space P, that is, a ball introduction port 391a. Further, both end portions of the partition member main body are armor portions (inflow restricting portions) 391b that restrict the inflow of game balls into the internal space P.
Here, the region partition member 391 (specifically, the partition member main body of the region partition member 391) forms a partition member having a predetermined thickness that defines the internal space P. In the internal space P, a ball introduction port 391a is formed on one side portion (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper left portion), and the inflow of game balls is restricted by the armor portion 391b.

As shown in FIG. 19, the base accommodating portion of the area partition member 391 has a front surface or the like decorated, and an opening for exposing the front surface of the bottom surface portion of the base member 390 accommodated in the base accommodating portion. 391c.
As shown in FIG. 20, the base accommodating portion of the region partition member 391 is provided with a locking claw 391 d that can be elastically deformed in the vertical direction with the base end portion as a fulcrum and can be engaged with the side surface portion of the base member 390. It has been. By this locking claw 391d, the region partition member 391 can maintain the state in which the base member 390 is housed in the base housing portion of the region partition member 391 (that is, the region partition member 391 is fixed to the base member 390). It has become. The number of the locking claws 391d is not limited to the illustrated example, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

The guide movable member 392 is formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light, has a concave chamber shape with an open rear surface, and is rotatable with respect to the base member 390 and the front decoration member 394. Yes.
Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20, the guide movable member 392 includes a rotation shaft pin 392 a that penetrates the lower end side of the guide movable member 392 along the front-rear direction. That is, one end portion of the rotation shaft pin 392a protrudes from the rear end surface of the guide movable member 392, and the other end portion of the rotation shaft pin 392a protrudes from the front surface. On the other hand, to the left of the winning opening 390a of the bottom surface of the base member 390, there is provided a left bearing hole 390c into which the tip of the rotation shaft pin 392a can be inserted from the front, and the rear surface of the front decorative member 394. A left bearing portion 394b, into which the tip end portion of the rotation shaft pin 392a can be inserted from the rear, protrudes toward the rear side of the ball guide rib 394a (described later). That is, the guide movable member 392 is inserted in the left end bearing hole 390c of the base member 390 while the other end portion of the rotation shaft pin 392a is inserted in the left region in the internal space P. Is inserted into the left bearing portion 394b of the front decorative member 394, so that the base member 390 and the front decorative member 394 are pivotally supported (mounted). Thereby, the guide movable member 392 rotates with respect to the base member 390 and the front decoration member 394, closes the ball introduction port 391a and does not accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32, and the ball introduction port 391a. Can be converted into an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is received.
As shown in FIG. 20, on the rear end surface of the guide movable member 392 (in this embodiment, on the lower right side of the rotation shaft pin 392a of the rear end surface of the guide movable member 392), the movable arm member 399 is provided. An arm engagement piece 392b that can be engaged with the left engagement portion 399a1 (described later) is provided to project rearward.

In addition, the production movable member 393 is formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light, has a concave chamber shape with an open rear surface, and is rotatable with respect to the base member 390 and the front decoration member 394. It has become.
Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20, the effect movable member 393 includes a rotation shaft pin 393 a that penetrates the lower end side of the effect movable member 393 along the front-rear direction. That is, one end portion of the rotation shaft pin 393a protrudes from the rear end surface of the effect movable member 393, and the other end portion of the rotation shaft pin 393a protrudes from the front surface. On the other hand, on the right side of the winning opening 390a of the bottom surface portion of the base member 390, a right bearing hole 390d into which the tip end portion of the rotation shaft pin 393a can be inserted from the front is provided, and the rear surface of the front decoration member 394 is provided. A right bearing portion 394c into which the tip end portion of the rotation shaft pin 393a can be inserted from the rear is provided on the right side of the ball guiding rib 394a (described later). That is, the effect movable member 393 is inserted in the right bearing hole 390d of the base member 390 in the state where the effect movable member 393 is arranged in the right region in the internal space P, and the other tip portion. Is inserted into the right bearing portion 394c of the front decorative member 394, so that the base member 390 and the front decorative member 394 are pivotally supported (mounted). As a result, the effect movable member 393 is rotated with respect to the base member 390 and the front decoration member 394 in a state of being disposed in the internal space P, so that the first state (the standing posture state) and the second state ( In a tilted posture state).
Further, as shown in FIG. 20, the movable arm member 399 is provided on the rear end surface of the effect movable member 393 (in the present embodiment, on the lower left side of the rotation shaft pin 393 a of the rear end surface of the effect movable member 393). An arm engagement piece 393b that can be engaged with a right engagement portion 399b1 (described later) is provided so as to protrude rearward.

The front decoration member 394 is made of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light, and the front surface or the like is decorated by uneven processing or the like.
As shown in FIG. 20, a ball guiding rib 394a for guiding a game ball that has flowed into the internal space P to the ball rolling surface 390b1 of the base member 390 is provided at the center of the rear surface of the front decorative member 394 in the left-right direction. Projecting toward the rear.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20, a cylindrical mounting boss 394d and a protruding positioning boss 394e along the front-rear direction are provided below the spherical guide rib 394a on the rear surface of the front decorative member 394. . In the present embodiment, two mounting bosses 394d and two positioning bosses 394e are provided. However, the number of mounting bosses 394d and positioning bosses 394e can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, a screw hole 390e penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the mounting boss 394d in the bottom surface portion of the base member 390, and at a position corresponding to the positioning boss 394e. Is provided with a through hole 390f penetrating in the front-rear direction. Then, with the positioning boss 394e inserted into the corresponding through hole 390f, a screw (not shown) is inserted into the mounting boss 394d of the front decorative member 394 from the rear of the base member 390 through the screw hole 390e of the base member 390. Thus, the front decoration member 394 can be fixed to the base member 390 in a state where the front decoration member 394 is positioned in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

An opening 395a corresponding to the outer shape of the protruding wall portion 390b is provided at a substantially central portion of the LED substrate 395 attached to the rear surface side of the base member 390. The LED board 395 includes a plurality of LEDs on the LED board 395 (specifically, on the front surface of the LED board 395) so as to surround the opening 395a, and emits light from the back of the base member 390. It is configured to be able to irradiate.
As described above, since the base member 390, the area partition member 391, the guide movable member 392, the effect movable member 393, and the front decoration member 394 are formed of a light-transmitting material, they are illuminated with light from the LED substrate 395. Can look like. That is, the LED included in the LED board 395 can emit light from the second special variable winning device 39 (variable winning device (specifically, the second variable winning device)). 2 light emitting means).

FIG. 21 shows a detailed structure of the movable arm member 399. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the movable arm member 399 as seen from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 21, the movable arm member 399 includes a left arm part 399a, a right arm part 399b, and a connecting part 399c that connects the left arm part 399a and the right arm part 399b.

The right arm portion 399b is provided with a right engagement portion 399b1 that can be engaged with the arm engagement piece 393b of the effect movable member 393 at the distal end (the end opposite to the connection portion 399c). An arm rotation shaft 399b2 extending in the left-right direction protrudes toward the right side at the end (the end on the connection portion 399c side) side.
The left arm portion 399a is provided with a left engagement portion 399a1 that can be engaged with the arm engagement piece 392b of the guide movable member 392 at the distal end (the end opposite to the connection portion 399c). An arm rotation shaft 399a2 extending in the left-right direction protrudes toward the left side on the base end portion (end portion on the coupling portion 399c side) side.
Further, a link engagement receiving portion 399a3 that can be engaged with the arm engagement piece 398c of the link member 398 is provided at the base end portion of the left arm portion 399a. On the other hand, the right arm portion 399b is not provided with such a link engagement receiving portion. That is, the right arm portion 399b differs from the left arm portion 399a only in that no link engagement receiving portion is provided, and the other points are substantially the same as the left arm portion 399a and have a mirror image relationship.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 26, the relationship between the movable arm member 399, the guide movable member 392, and the effect movable member 393, and how the guide movable member 392 and the effect movable member 393 move will be described.
FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the second special variation winning device 39 as viewed from the rear side. Here, in FIG. 22, illustration of the count switch 39a, the big prize opening solenoid 39b, and the mechanism base member 397 is omitted.
FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing the state of the drive mechanism of the second special variable winning device 39 when the guide movable member 392 is in the closed state, and FIG. 23 (b) shows the state of the guide movable member 392. It is a figure which shows the state of the drive mechanism of the 2nd special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 39 in the case of an open state.
FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the second special variation winning device 39 as viewed from the left side.
FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the upper left side of the game board 30 as viewed from the front side.
FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the winning of a game ball to the second special variation winning device 39.

  As shown in FIG. 22, for example, when the guide member 396 is mounted on the base member 390 from behind the LED substrate 395 with the movable arm member 399 mounted on the guide member 396 from above, the guide member 396 is mounted on the guide member 396. The arm rotation shafts 399a2 and 399b2 of the movable arm member 399 placed are engaged with the arm bearing portion 390b2 of the base member 390. As a result, the movable arm member 399 is pivotally supported (attached) to the base member 390 and can rotate with respect to the base member 390. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), the left engaging portion 399a1 of the movable arm member 399 placed on the guide member 396 engages with the arm engaging piece 392b of the guide movable member 392, and the right engaging portion. The joint portion 399b1 engages with the arm engagement piece 393b of the effect movable member 393.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23B, when the plunger 39b1 of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is pulled (in the case of the present embodiment, when the tip end of the plunger 39b1 moves to the right), the plunger engagement receiving portion The link member 398 engaged with the plunger 39b1 is rotated by 398b, and the arm engagement piece 398c of the link member 398 is moved downward. When the arm engagement piece 398c moves downward, the movable arm member 399 that engages with the arm engagement piece 398c is rotated by the link engagement receiving portion 399a3, and the left engagement portion of the movable arm member 399 is rotated. 399a1 and the right engagement portion 399b1 move upward. When the left engagement portion 399a1 and the right engagement portion 399b1 move upward, the guide movable member 392 engaged with the left engagement portion 399a1 is rotated by the arm engagement piece 392b (in the case of this embodiment, counterclockwise). The effect movable member 393 engaged with the right engagement portion 399b1 is rotated by the arm engagement piece 393b (in the case of this embodiment, rotated clockwise).
In this way, the guide movable member 392 can be converted into an open state and a closed state. In addition, the production movable member 393 can be converted from the first state (the standing posture state) to the second state (the tilted posture state) in accordance with the conversion of the guiding movable member 392 from the closed state to the open state. With the conversion of the movable member 392 from the open state to the closed state, the second state can be converted to the first state.

Here, as shown in FIG. 25, on the upper left side of the frame member 440 of the center case unit 40, an armor portion for guiding the game ball to flow down the left side or the right side of the display device 41 (access restriction). Part) 440b is provided. The armor portion 440b is divided, and the second special variable prize winning device 39 closes the divided portion so that the armor portion 391b of the area partition member 391 is substantially continuous with the armor portion 440b of the frame member 440. .
Then, the game ball launched into the game area 32 through the launch ball guide path 32 b collides with the armor portion 440 b of the frame member 440 and the armor portion 391 b of the second special variation winning device 39. A game ball guided so as to collide with the armor portions 440b and 391b above the guide movable member 392 and flow down the left side of the display device 41, if the guide movable member 392 is closed, The armor portions 440b and 391b (specifically, the armor portions 440b and 391b below the guide movable member 392) are guided to flow down the left side of the display device 41. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26, when the guide movable member 392 is in the open state, the guide movable member 392 is guided and passes through the ball introduction port 391a.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the game ball that has passed through the ball introduction port 391a is guided by the ball guiding rib 394a of the front decorative member 394 and passes through the winning opening 390a (corresponding to the big winning opening) of the base member 390, Roll on the ball rolling surface 390b1 of the member 390. The game ball that has rolled on the ball rolling surface 390b1 is then guided to the winning ball guide portion 396a of the guide member 396 by the guide portion 396b of the guide member 396, and the detecting portion 39a1 of the count switch 39a by the winning ball guide portion 396a. Be guided to. Thereby, the game ball is detected by the count switch 39a as a game ball won in the second special variation winning device 39.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 24, the guide portion 396b of the guide member 396 not only guides the game ball, but also substantially contacts with the connecting portion 399c of the movable arm member 399, so that the movable arm member 399 rotates. It is configured to guide. Thereby, since the rotation operation of the movable arm member 399 is assisted, the guide movable member 392 and the guide movable member 392 can be reliably opened and closed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 26, a game ball that has flowed into the internal space P is located in the internal space P on the side of the effect movable member 393 (above the winning opening 390a) of the bottom surface of the base member 390. That is, a flow-down restricting wall 390g for restricting the inflow from flowing into the right region) projects toward the front side. As a result, the game ball flows into the right area (effect area) in the internal space P, causing a problem in the rotation operation of the guide movable member 392 and the effect movable member 393, or the flow into the internal space P. It is possible to prevent inconvenience such as the game ball not winning in the winning opening 390a (corresponding to the big winning opening).
Here, the flow-down restriction wall 390g forms a restriction wall portion that can restrict the movement of the game ball received in the internal space P from the ball introduction port 391a to the effect movable member 393 side.

In the case of the present embodiment, the flow restriction wall 390g is composed of a first wall portion disposed along the vertical direction and a second wall portion protruding rightward from the lower end portion of the first wall portion. However, the shape of the flow restriction wall 390g can be arbitrarily changed as long as it can restrict the movement of the game ball received in the internal space P from the ball introduction port 391a to the effect movable member 393 side. is there.
In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the internal space P is extended to the right side in the internal space P by extending the flow restriction wall 390g between the lower end side of the guide movable member 392 and the lower end side of the effect movable member 393. It is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball that has flowed into the internal space P from coming into contact with the effect movable member 393 while preventing the inflow into the region (effect region). As a result, it is more effective that troubles occur in the rotation operation of the guide movable member 392 and the effect movable member 393, or that inconveniences such as a game ball that has flowed into the internal space P does not enter the big prize opening. Can be prevented.

Also, as shown in FIG. 26, the effect movable member is located at a position corresponding to the flow restriction wall 390g of the base member 390 (in the present embodiment, the second wall portion of the flow restriction wall 390g) of the effect movable member 393. A restriction wall receiving portion 393c that establishes communication between the inside and the outside of 393 is established. Accordingly, the flow restriction wall 390g of the base member 390 (in the case of the present embodiment, the second wall portion of the flow restriction wall 390g) is at least the restriction wall receiving portion 393c when the effect movable member 393 is in the standing posture. Therefore, even if the flow restriction wall 390g is provided, the guide movable member 392 and the effect movable member 393 can be brought close to each other. Therefore, even if the flow restriction wall 390g is provided, the effect movable member 393 can efficiently emphasize the conversion of the guide movable member 392 to the open state.
Here, the guide movable member 392 is not provided with such a restriction wall receiving portion. That is, the effect movable member 393 is different from the guide movable member 392 only in that the restriction wall receiving portion 393c is provided, and the other points are substantially the same as the guide movable member 392 and have a mirror image relationship.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 26, a retracting portion 391e that is recessed outward is formed at a position corresponding to the effect movable member 393 in the partition member main body of the region partition member 391. The effect movable member 393 is configured such that the tip end (upper end) of the tilt enters the retracting portion 391e in the second state (the tilted posture). Therefore, without increasing the size of the internal space P (that is, the size of the second special variable winning device 39), the size of the guide movable member 392 and the effect movable member 393 is increased, or the guide movable member 392 and the effect movable The movable range of the member 393 can be increased.

FIG. 27 shows the detailed structure of the upper effect unit 600. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the upper effect unit 600 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 27, the upper effect unit 600 mainly includes a movable mechanism unit 610, a movable guide unit 630 attached to the movable mechanism unit 610 from the front, and a movable mechanism unit 610 from the front of the movable guide unit 630. And a decorative movable part 650 to be mounted.
Here, the upper effect unit 600 constitutes a movable effect device capable of performing an effect operation according to the progress of the game. The decoration movable unit 650 is a movable production member capable of performing an effect operation, the movable mechanism unit 610 is a drive mechanism unit for causing the decoration movable unit 650 to perform an effect operation, and the movable guide unit 630 is operated. Movably supports the decorative movable portion 650 and forms an intermediate member disposed between the decorative movable portion 650 and the movable mechanism portion 610.

FIG. 28 shows a detailed structure of the movable mechanism unit 610. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the movable mechanism unit 610 viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 28, the movable mechanism portion 610 is mainly formed in a unit base member 611 having a generally mountain shape in front view and a unit base member 611 (in the case of this embodiment, a substantially central portion of the unit base member 611). Provided on the link rotating plate 612 mounted from the front, the decorative rotating plate 613 mounted on the front surface of the link rotating plate 612, and the unit base member 611 (in this embodiment, the upper left side of the unit base member 611). A motor (drive source) 614 mounted on the motor mounting portion 611a from the front, a motor fixing member 615 mounted on the unit base member 611 from the front of the motor 614, a motor 614 and a unit fixed to the drive shaft of the motor 614 A main driving gear 616 disposed between the base member 611 and the main driving gear mounted on the unit base member 611 from the front. 16 and the second driven gear 618 disposed between the link rotating plate 612 and the gear mounted on the unit base member 611 from the front of the first driven gear 617 and the second driven gear 618. The presser member 619 and a unit base member 611 (in this embodiment, a position detection sensor 621 mounted from the front on the unit base member 611 directly above the position where the link rotation plate 612 is disposed) are configured. The
Here, the motor 614 serves as an electrical drive source capable of generating a driving force for operating the decorative movable unit 650 (movable effect member), and the link rotary plate 612 and the decorative rotary plate 613 are the motor 614. The drive member which can perform the drive operation for operating the decoration movable part 650 with the drive force from is made.

On the upper part of the unit base member 611, an upper LED substrate 622 is mounted for illuminating the decorative part 440 c (see FIG. 16) that constitutes the upper part of the frame member 440 of the center case unit 40. In addition, a lower LED substrate 623 for causing the movable guide portion 630 to shine is attached to the lower portion of the unit base member 611.
Here, the central portion and the lower portion of the movable mechanism portion 610 are covered with the movable guide portion 630 and the decorative movable portion 650 disposed in front of the movable mechanism portion 610, but the upper portion of the movable mechanism portion 610 is covered. It is configured not to be. Therefore, the light from the upper LED substrate 622 mounted on the upper portion of the unit base member 611 is directly irradiated to the decoration portion 440c.

The link rotating plate 612 is a substantially disk-shaped gear and is rotatable with respect to the unit base member 611.
Specifically, a through hole 612 a that penetrates in the front-rear direction is provided at the center of the link rotation plate 612. On the other hand, a first pivot shaft pin 611b whose front end portion can be inserted into the through hole 612a projects from the substantially central portion of the unit base member 611 toward the front side. That is, the link rotation plate 612 is configured to be pivotally attached to the unit base member 611 by inserting the first rotation shaft pin 611b of the unit base member 611 from the rear into the through hole 612a. Thereby, the link rotation plate 612 can be rotated (rotated) with respect to the unit base member 611.

The decorative rotating plate 613 has a substantially disk shape having a smaller diameter than the link rotating plate 612 and can rotate together with the link rotating plate 612.
Specifically, an engagement pin 612b protrudes from the front surface of the link rotating plate 612 at a position spaced from the through hole 612a. On the other hand, a pin insertion hole 613a through which the engagement pin 612b can be inserted in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the engagement pin 612b in the decorative rotating plate 613. That is, the decorative rotating plate 613 is configured to be attached to the front surface of the link rotating plate 612 by inserting the engaging pin 612b of the link rotating plate 612 from the rear into the pin insertion hole 613a. Thereby, the decorative rotating plate 613 can be rotated (rotated) together with the rotation (rotation) of the link rotating plate 612, that is, can rotate together with the link rotating plate 612.

Thus, the drive members (the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613) are disk-shaped rotating bodies that rotate around the first rotating shaft pin 611b (rotating shaft) extending in the front-rear direction. An engagement pin 612b (drive engagement portion) is provided at a position eccentric from the first rotation shaft pin 611b.
Here, the link rotating plate 612 forms a main body that receives transmission of driving force from the motor 614 (electric drive source). The decorative rotating plate 613 is arranged behind the decorative movable portion 650 (movable effect member) and has a decorative portion with a predetermined decoration on the front surface. The decorative rotating plate 613 is a link rotating plate. 612 is disposed on the front surface.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to maintain the state in which the decorative rotating plate 613 is attached to the front surface of the link rotating plate 612, it is configured to be screwed.
Specifically, the link rotating plate 612 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 612c penetrating in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, a cylindrical mounting boss (not shown) along the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the screw hole 612c on the rear surface of the decorative rotating plate 613. Then, with the engagement pin 612b of the link rotating plate 612 inserted from the rear into the pin insertion hole 613a of the decorative rotating plate 613, a screw (not shown) is inserted from the rear of the link rotating plate 612 into the screw hole 612c of the link rotating plate 612. The decorative rotating plate 613 can be fixed to the front surface of the link rotating plate 612 by being inserted into the mounting boss of the decorative rotating plate 613 via the.

The motor 614 is configured to be fixed to the unit base member 611 by the motor fixing member 615 with the drive shaft directed to the rear side.
Specifically, a plurality of screw receiving portions 614 a into which screws can be inserted from the front are provided on the side surface of the motor 614. On the other hand, a first screw hole 615a penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the screw receiving portion 614a in the motor fixing member 615. That is, in a state where the motor fixing member 615 is disposed in front of the motor 614, a screw (not shown) is screwed from the front of the motor fixing member 615 through the first screw hole 615a of the motor fixing member 615 to the screw receiving portion 614a of the motor 614. The motor 614 can be attached to the motor fixing member 615 by being inserted into the motor fixing member 615.
The motor fixing member 615 is provided with a second screw hole 615b penetrating in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, a cylindrical mounting boss 611c extending in the front-rear direction projects from the unit base member 611 at a position corresponding to the second screw hole 615b toward the front side. That is, the motor is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) from the front of the motor fixing member 615 to which the motor 614 is attached into the mounting boss 611c of the unit base member 611 through the second screw hole 615b of the motor fixing member 615. The motor 614 can be fixed to the unit base member 611 by the member 615.

The first driven gear 617 has a second rotation shaft pin 611d protruding from a rear side at a predetermined position of the unit base member 611 in a through hole 617a provided at the center of the first driven gear 617 from the rear. By being inserted, the unit base member 611 is configured to be pivotally attached. Accordingly, the first driven gear 617 can be rotated (rotated) with respect to the unit base member 611.
Similarly, the second driven gear 618 is provided with a third rotating shaft projecting forward at a predetermined position of the unit base member 611 in a through hole 618a provided at the center of the second driven gear 618. By inserting the pin 611e from the rear, the unit base member 611 is configured to be pivotally attached. Accordingly, the second driven gear 618 can be rotated (rotated) with respect to the unit base member 611.

The first driven gear 617 meshes with the main driving gear 616 fixed to the drive shaft of the motor 614 in a state of being pivotally attached to the unit base member 611 (specifically, the second rotation shaft pin 611d), It meshes with the second driven gear 618 that is pivotally attached to the unit base member 611 (specifically, the third rotation shaft pin 611e).
Further, the second driven gear 618 is pivotally attached to the unit base member 611 (specifically, the third rotation shaft pin 611e), and the unit base member 611 (specifically, the second rotation shaft). The first driven gear 617 that is pivotally attached to the pin 611d) is engaged with the peripheral end portion of the link rotary plate 612 that is pivotally attached to the unit base member 611 (specifically, the first rotary shaft pin 611b). It meshes with the formed teeth (gear part).
Accordingly, when the drive shaft of the motor 614 rotates, the main driving gear 616 rotates, and accordingly, the first driven gear 617 that meshes with the main driving gear 616 and the second driven gear 618 that meshes with the first driven gear 617. The link rotating plate 612 that meshes with the second driven gear 618 and the decorative rotating plate 613 that rotates together with the link rotating plate 612 are configured to rotate.

In the present embodiment, the driven gears 617 and 618 are sandwiched between the gear pressing member 619 and the unit base member 611 in order to maintain the driven gears 617 and 618 mounted on the unit base member 611. Has been.
Specifically, the gear pressing member 619 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 619a penetrating in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, a cylindrical mounting boss 611f along the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the screw hole 619a in the unit base member 611. Then, the driven gears 617 and 618 are pivotally attached to the unit base member 611, and the gear pressing member 619 is disposed in front of the driven gears 617 and 618, and screws (not shown) are geared from the front of the gear pressing member 619. By inserting into the mounting boss 611f of the unit base member 611 through the screw hole 619a of the pressing member 619, the driven gears 617 and 618 are sandwiched between the gear pressing member 619 and the unit base member 611, and the driven gears 617 and 618 are sandwiched. Is configured so as not to come off from the pivot shaft pins 611d and 611e.

The position detection sensor 621 is a photo interrupter for detecting the position of the decorative movable part 650 and is screwed to the unit base member 611.
Specifically, the position detection sensor 621 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 621a penetrating in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, at a position corresponding to the screw hole 621a in the unit base member 611, a cylindrical mounting boss 611g along the front-rear direction protrudes toward the front side. Then, with the position detection sensor 621 disposed in front of the unit base member 611, a screw (not shown) is attached from the front of the position detection sensor 621 to the mounting boss of the unit base member 611 through the screw hole 621a of the position detection sensor 621. The position detection sensor 621 can be fixed to the unit base member 611 by being inserted into 611g.

FIG. 29 shows a detailed structure of the movable guide portion 630. FIG. 29A is an exploded perspective view of the movable guide portion 630 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 29B is a perspective view of the movable guide portion 630 viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 29A, the movable guide portion 630 mainly includes a guide lens member 631, a left guide member 632 attached to the left front portion of the guide lens member 631, and a right front surface of the guide lens member 631. And a decoration member 634 that is mounted on the right side of the front surface of the guide lens member 631 on the right side of the right guide member 633 and decorates the right side portion of the upper effect unit 600.

The guide lens member 631 is formed of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light, and the front surface of the guide lens member 631 is decorated by uneven processing or the like. An exposure opening 631 a for exposing the decorative rotating plate 613 of the movable mechanism 610 is formed at a substantially central portion of the guide lens member 631.
Here, the exposure opening 631a forms an exposed portion for exposing the decorative rotating plate 613 (decorating portion) to the front.

As shown in FIG. 29A, the left guide member 632 includes an upright wall portion that stands up with respect to the guide lens member 631, and a protruding wall portion that protrudes rightward from the front end portion of the upright wall portion. “L” -shaped member.
The left guide member 632 is provided with a plurality of screw receiving portions 632a into which screws can be inserted from the rear. On the other hand, a screw hole 631b penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the screw receiving portion 632a in the guide lens member 631. Then, with the left guide member 632 disposed in front of the guide lens member 631, a screw (not shown) is received from the rear of the guide lens member 631 through the screw hole 631b of the guide lens member 631. The left guide member 632 can be fixed to the front surface of the guide lens member 631 by being inserted into the portion 632a.
When the left guide member 632 is mounted on the front surface of the guide lens member 631, as shown in FIG. 29B, the guide lens member 631 and the left guide member 632 are directed toward the exposure opening 631a side (that is, the right side). Thus, a left guide groove 630a is formed. The left guide groove 630a is configured such that a left end portion of a movable base member 653 (described later) of the decorative movable portion 650 can be slidably inserted.

As shown in FIG. 29A, the right guide member 633 includes an upright wall portion that stands up with respect to the guide lens member 631, and a protruding wall portion that protrudes leftward from the front end portion of the upright wall portion. “L” -shaped member.
The right guide member 633 is provided with a plurality of screw receiving portions 633a into which screws can be inserted from the rear. On the other hand, a screw hole 631c penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the screw receiving portion 633a in the guide lens member 631. Then, with the right guide member 633 disposed in front of the guide lens member 631, a screw (not shown) is received from the rear of the guide lens member 631 through the screw hole 631c of the guide lens member 631. The right guide member 633 can be fixed to the front surface of the guide lens member 631 by being inserted into the portion 633a.
When the right guide member 633 is mounted on the front surface of the guide lens member 631, as shown in FIG. 29B, the guide lens member 631 and the right guide member 633 direct the exposure opening 631a side (that is, the left side). Thus, a right guide groove 630b is formed. The right guide groove 630b is configured such that the right end portion of a movable base member 653 (described later) of the decorative movable portion 650 can be slidably inserted. In other words, the left guide groove 630a and the right guide groove 630b are opened facing each other.

FIG. 30 shows the detailed structure of the decorative movable part 650. 30A is an exploded perspective view of the decorative movable unit 650 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the decorative movable unit 650 as viewed from the lower surface side.
As shown in FIG. 30A, the decorative movable portion 650 mainly includes a movable lens member (logo member) 651, an LED substrate 652 mounted on the rear surface side of the movable lens member 651, and the movable lens member 651. A substantially rectangular plate-shaped movable base member 653 mounted on the rear surface from behind the LED substrate 652 is configured.

A light shielding plate 653 a that can be inserted between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the position detection sensor 621 provided in the movable mechanism unit 610 protrudes upward from the upper end of the movable base member 653.
Also, an elongated hole that is elongated in the left-right direction is provided on the upper portion of the movable base member 653 as an engagement hole 653b through which the engagement pin 612b of the link rotating plate 612 provided in the movable mechanism 610 can be slidably inserted. It has been. The engaging pin 612b of the link rotating plate 612 projects to the front side of the decorative rotating plate 613 through the pin insertion hole 613a of the decorative rotating plate 613, and is configured to engage with the engaging hole 653b on the front surface side. ing. Here, the engagement hole 653b forms a movable engagement portion that engages with the engagement pin 612b (drive engagement portion).

  The movable lens member 651 is formed of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light, and the front surface of the movable lens member 651 is decorated with a logo or the like by uneven processing or the like. The LED substrate 652 mounted on the rear surface side of the movable lens member 651 includes LEDs on the LED substrate 652 (specifically, on the front surface of the LED substrate 652), and is located behind the movable lens member 651. It is comprised so that light can be irradiated from.

Here, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), a portion on the front side of the movable lens member 651 approximately in the front-rear direction (hereinafter referred to as “front portion of the movable lens member 651”) is approximately the front-rear direction of the movable lens member 651. It protrudes toward the left side and the right side from the rear part from the center (hereinafter referred to as “the rear part of the movable lens member 651”). The length in the left-right direction of the front portion of the movable lens member 651 is set to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of the movable base member 653 or slightly longer than the length in the left-right direction of the movable base member 653. .
Therefore, when the movable base member 653 is attached to the rear surface of the movable lens member 651, as shown in FIG. 30B, the space between the left end portion of the front portion of the movable lens member 651 and the left end portion of the movable base member 653 is obtained. A gap is formed. This gap becomes a left guide receiving portion (sliding portion) 650a into which the left guide member 632 (specifically, the protruding wall portion of the left guide member 632) provided in the movable guide portion 630 can be slidably inserted. A gap is also formed between the right end portion of the front portion of the movable lens member 651 and the right end portion of the movable base member 653. This gap becomes a right guide receiving portion (sliding portion) 650b into which a right guide member 633 (specifically, a protruding wall portion of the right guide member 633) provided in the movable guide portion 630 can be slidably inserted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, the rendering operation by the upper rendering unit 600 will be described.
FIG. 31A is a front view of the upper effect unit 600 when the decoration movable unit 650 is in the initial position, and FIG. 31B shows the movable lens member 651 in FIG. It is a figure when omitted.
FIG. 32A is a front view of the upper effect unit 600 when the decorative movable portion 650 is moved downward from the initial position, and the movable lens member 651 is not shown. FIG. 32B is a view when the movable lens member 651 is not omitted in FIG.
FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view of the upper effect unit 600 viewed from the right side when the decoration movable unit 650 is in a position moved downward from the initial position.

  As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, when the decorative movable portion 650 is in the initial position, the light shielding plate 653a of the movable base member 653 provided in the decorative movable portion 650 receives the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 621. And the position detection sensor 621 detects the position. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the engagement pin 612b of the link rotating plate 612 provided in the movable mechanism unit 610 is positioned directly above the rotating shaft (first rotating shaft pin 611b) of the link rotating plate 612. doing. And the decoration movable part 650 (movable production | presentation member) is before the operation | movement by a drive member (Link rotation board 612 and decoration rotation board 613) (Namely, when the said decoration movement part 650 exists in an initial position), The decorative rotating plate 613 (decorating portion) is covered (shielded) at the front.

  When the driving members (the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613) included in the movable mechanism unit 610 rotate, the engaging pins 612b of the link rotating plate 612 move downward as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b). And move. When the engagement pin 612b moves downward, the decorative movable portion 650 including the movable base member 653 that is slidably engaged with the engagement pin 612b through the engagement hole 653b includes the left guide member 632 and the right guide member. A part of the decorative rotating plate 613 is made visible, and a part of the display area R of the display device 41 is covered (shielded). As described above, the decoration movable portion 650 (movable effect member) is orthogonal to the first rotation shaft pin 611b (rotation axis) when the drive member rotates during operation by the drive members (link rotation plate 612 and decoration rotation plate 613). Move in the direction you want. And the decoration movable part 650 shifts | deviates from the front of the said drive member at the time of the operation | movement by a drive member, and can visually recognize the decoration rotation board 613 (decoration part).

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the movable guide portion 630 (intermediate member) is movable mechanism portion 610 (with the decorative rotating plate 613 (decorative portion) exposed from the exposed opening 631 a (exposed portion). The driving mechanism) is covered (shielded). That is, portions other than the decorative rotating plate 613 in the central portion and the lower portion of the movable mechanism portion 610 are covered (shielded) by the movable guide portion 630.

Further, the drive member (the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613) is configured such that the decorative rotating plate 613 is movable from the exposure opening 631a with the link rotating plate 612 (main body portion) disposed behind the movable guide portion 630. It faces the front of the part 630.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the front surface of the decorative rotating plate 613 is substantially flush with the front surface of the movable guide portion 630, so that the decorative rotating plate 613 is exposed to the movable guide portion 630 from the exposure opening 631a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative rotating plate 613 is protruded forward from the front surface of the movable guide portion 630 by moving the decorative rotating plate 613 from the exposed opening 631a. It is also possible to configure to face the front of the part 630. That is, “the decorative rotating plate 613 faces the front of the movable guide portion 630 from the exposure opening 631a” means “the front surface of the decorative rotating plate 613 is substantially flush with the front surface of the movable guide portion 630” or “the decorative rotating plate The front surface of 613 protrudes further forward than the front surface of the movable guide portion 630. "
In this embodiment, the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613 constituting the driving member are separately configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613 are integrally formed. It is also possible to configure. In that case, a decorative portion may be formed on the front surface of the link rotating plate 612.

34 to 37 show modified examples of the upper effect unit 600. FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the decorative rotating plate 613 provided in the upper effect unit 600 of the modification as viewed from the front side. Moreover, FIGS. 35-37 is a front view of the principal part of the top production | generation effect unit 600 of a modification.
As shown in FIG. 34, the decoration rotating plate 613 (decoration part) is provided with an expectation degree display part E on which a plurality of expectation degree information E1 to E3 indicating the expectation degree at which the variable display game has a special result is displayed. ing.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, a predetermined position around the exposure opening 631a of the guide lens member 631 of the movable guide portion 630 (in this embodiment, the uppermost position among the circumferences of the exposure opening 631a). Is provided with an expectation degree suggesting member F for indicating the corresponding expectation degree information among the plurality of expectation degree information E1 to E3 displayed on the expectation degree display portion E of the decorative rotating plate 613.

And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 which controls the upper production | presentation unit 600 of a modification changes the rotation angle of a drive member (link rotation board 612 and the decoration rotation board 613) according to the expectation from which a variable display game will become a special result. It is configured as follows.
Specifically, in the production control device 300, for example, when the decoration movable unit 650 is in the initial position (that is, the light shielding plate 653a of the movable base member 653 provided in the decoration movable unit 650 is detected by the position detection sensor 621. When the rotation angle of the driving member (link rotating plate 612 and decorative rotating plate 613) is “0 degree” and the driving member is rotated (turned), the expectation that the variable display game will have a special result is higher. A large rotation angle is set as the rotation angle of the drive member. Therefore, the higher the expectation that the variable display game will have a special result, the greater the rotation angle of the drive member and the greater the amount of movement of the decoration movable unit 650 from the initial position.

Here, the plurality of expectation degree information E1 to E3 is expected so that the expectation degree information set with a higher expectation level becomes visible as the operation amount (movement amount) of the decorative movable portion 650 (movable effect member) increases. It is arranged in the degree display part E.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, a plurality of expectation level information E1 to E3 has predetermined expectation level information depending on the rotation of the drive members (link rotation plate 612 and decorative rotation plate 613) corresponding to the expectation level. It is comprised so that it may arrange | position to the expectation degree display part E so that a position (position pointed by the expectation degree suggestion member F) may be reached.

  More specifically, for example, when the degree of expectation in which the variable display game has a special result is in a low state, as shown in FIG. 35, the degree of expectation suggesting member F includes a plurality of pieces of expectation information E1 to E3. Of these, the expectation information E1 (“low”) is indicated as the corresponding expectation information. At this time, the driving members (the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613) rotate. However, since the rotation angle is small, the moving amount of the decorative movable unit 650 from the initial position is small, and most of the decorative rotating plate 613 is It is concealed (shielded) by the decorative movable part 650. Therefore, the expectation degree information E1 (“low”) and the expectation degree information E2 (“medium”) arranged next to the expectation degree information E1 (“low”) are visible, but the expectation degree information E2 Expectation degree information E3 (“high”) arranged at a position farther from the expectation degree information E1 (“low”) than (“medium”) is hidden in the decorative movable portion 650.

In addition, when the expectation level at which the variable display game has a special result is in the middle state, as shown in FIG. 36, the expectation level suggesting member F includes the corresponding expectation level information among the plurality of expectation level information E1 to E3. As the expectation degree information E2 ("medium"). At this time, since the rotation angle of the drive member (the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613) is larger than when the degree of expectation is low, the amount of movement from the initial position of the decorative movable unit 650 is increased, and the decorative member is increased. About half of the rotating plate 613 is visible.
Further, when the expectation level at which the variable display game results in a special result is in a high state, as shown in FIG. 37, the expectation level suggesting member F includes the corresponding expectation level information among a plurality of expectation level information E1 to E3. As the expectation degree information E3 ("high"). At this time, since the rotation angle of the drive member (the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613) is larger than when the expectation is in the middle state, the amount of movement of the decorative movable unit 650 from the initial position is further increased. Most of the decorative rotating plate 613 is visible.

In the present embodiment, the expectation level information E1 (“low”), expectation level information E2 (“medium”), and expectation level information E3 (“high”) are expected level information E. However, the number of pieces of expectation degree information displayed on the expectation degree display unit E can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is plural.
The expectation level information is arranged in such a way that the expectation level information is set so that the expectation level information becomes visible as the operation amount (movement amount) of the decorative movable unit 650 (movable effect member) increases. If it is arranged in the part E, it can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

FIG. 38 shows the detailed structure of the side effect unit 700. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the side effect unit 700 as seen from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 38, the side effect unit 700 is mainly composed of a unit base member 710 having a concave shape in the rear opening and a substantially rectangular shape in front view (a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction), and a unit base member 710. (In the case of this embodiment, it is provided in the drive mechanism part 720 mounted from the rear on the lower right side of the unit base member 710) and the unit base member 710 (in the case of this embodiment, the upper right side of the unit base member 710). A permanent magnet (hard magnetic body) 730 accommodated in the magnet accommodating portion 710a from behind, a magnet presser member 740 attached to the unit base member 710 from behind the permanent magnet 730, and attached to the unit base member 710 from the front. And a movable decorative member 750.
Here, the side effect unit 700 forms a movable effect device capable of performing an effect operation according to the progress of the game. The movable decorative member 750 is a movable effect member capable of performing an effect operation, and the drive mechanism unit 720 serves as a drive mechanism for causing the movable decorative member 750 to perform an effect operation.

FIG. 39 shows the detailed structure of the movable decorative member 750. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the movable decorative member 750 as viewed from the rear side.
As shown in FIG. 39, the movable decorative member 750 mainly includes a lower movable portion 750A including a plurality of front decorative members 751 and a proximal-side movable body 752 on which the plurality of front decorative members 751 are mounted from the front. And an upper movable portion 750B that is disposed above the lower movable portion 750A and includes a plurality of front decorative members 751 and a tip-side movable body 753 to which the front decorative members 751 are attached from the front. Configured.

  In the case of this embodiment, the front decoration member 751 has a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and the proximal end side movable body 752 and the distal end side movable body 753 have a shape imitating a cherry tree branch. More specifically, the proximal-side movable body 752 and the distal-side movable body 753 have a shape simulating one main branch and a plurality of side branches extending from the main branch. When the upper end portion of the main branch portion and the lower end portion of the main branch portion of the distal end side movable body 753 are connected, a shape simulating a continuous branch is formed.

The distal end side movable body 753 constituting the upper movable portion 750B is rotatable with respect to the proximal end side movable body 752 constituting the lower movable portion 750A.
Specifically, a through hole 752 a that penetrates in the front-rear direction is provided at the upper end of the main branch portion of the base end side movable body 752. On the other hand, the lower end portion of the main branch portion of the distal end side movable body 753 is provided with a covering wall portion 753a1 that hangs down from the end surface of the lower end portion and covers the upper end portion of the main branch portion of the proximal end side movable body 752 from the front. In addition, a connecting pin 753a that can be inserted into the through-hole 752a projects from the covering wall portion 753a1 toward the rear side. That is, the distal end side movable body 753 is configured to be pivotally supported (attached) to the proximal end side movable body 752 by inserting the connecting pin 753a into the through hole 752a of the proximal end side movable body 752 from the front. As a result, the upper end portion of the main branch portion of the base end side movable body 752 and the lower end portion of the main branch portion of the tip end side movable body 753 are connected, and the tip end side movable body 753 is connected to the base end side movable body 752. A pivotable joint J is formed.
Here, the proximal-side movable body 752 is a first movable body that operates by receiving a driving force from the drive mechanism unit 720 (drive mechanism), and the distal-side movable body 753 is jointed to the proximal-side movable body 752. The second movable body is connected via the part J and operates in conjunction with the proximal-side movable body 752.

  Here, the proximal end side movable body 752 and the distal end side movable body 753 are biased by the biasing member (spring) 754 so that the joint portion J extends. In this embodiment, as the biasing member 754, a torsion coil spring (torsion spring) having a free angle of approximately 180 degrees and capable of inserting the connecting pin 753a of the distal end side movable body 753 into the coil portion is used. The biasing member 754 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

A through hole 752a provided in the upper end portion of the main branch portion of the base end side movable body 752 has a coil portion of the biasing member 754 in the through hole 752a in a state where the connecting pin 753a is inserted into the through hole 752a. It can be accommodated. Further, at the upper end portion of the main branch portion of the base end side movable body 752, a spring engaging portion 752b (see FIG. 40) that engages with one arm portion of the biasing member 754 is provided below the through hole 752a. Grooves extending toward the surface are provided. Further, at the upper end portion of the main branch portion of the base end side movable body 752, an opening portion that opens upward from the through hole 752a is provided as a movable region 752c of the other arm portion of the biasing member 754. . On the other hand, a spring engaging portion 753b (see FIG. 40) that engages with the other arm portion of the urging member 754 is provided on the lower end portion of the main branch portion of the distal end side movable body 753 from the end surface of the lower end portion toward the upper side. A groove extending in the direction is provided. That is, the connecting pin 753a of the distal end side movable body 753 is inserted from the front into the through hole 752a of the proximal end side movable body 752, and in this state, the coil portion is accommodated in the through hole 752a and one arm portion is the proximal end. The urging member 754 is moved from the rear side to the proximal side so that the other arm portion is accommodated in the spring engaging portion 752b of the side movable body 752 and the other arm portion is accommodated in the spring engaging portion 753b of the distal end side movable body 753. By mounting across the movable body 752 and the distal-side movable body 753, the proximal-side movable body 752 and the distal-side movable body 753 are biased by the biasing member 754 so that the joint portion J extends ( In the case of the present embodiment, the biasing member 754 is configured to be connected in a state where the arm angle is biased in a direction to return the arm angle to a free angle (approximately 180 degrees).
In this embodiment, in order to prevent friction and wear between the through hole 752a of the proximal end side movable body 752 and the connection pin 753a of the distal end side movable body 753, a bush (lubricating member) 755 is provided on the connection pin 753a. , And by attaching a retaining metal fitting 756 to the distal end portion of the connecting pin 753a, the distal end side movable body 753 is detached from the proximal end side movable body 752, or the urging member 754 is attached to the base member 754. It is configured to prevent the end-side movable body 752 and the tip-side movable body 753 from coming off and the bush 755 from coming off from the connecting pin 753a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, how the distal end side movable body 753 moves will be described.
40 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the proximal end side movable body 752 and the distal end side movable body 753 in a state where the joint portion J is extended. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the relationship between the proximal-side movable body 752 and the distal-side movable body 753 when the distal-side movable body 753 rotates in one direction from the state where the joint portion J is extended. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the proximal-side movable body 752 and the distal-side movable body 753 when the distal-side movable body 753 rotates in the other direction from the state in which the joint portion J is extended. Here, in FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, illustration of the front decoration member 751 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in a state where the joint portion J is extended, that is, in a state where the proximal end side movable body 752 and the distal end side movable body 753 are arranged in series in one direction, the proximal end side movable body 752 The upper end portion end surface of the main branch portion and the lower end portion end surface of the main branch portion of the distal end side movable body 753 face each other in a spaced state. Here, the upper end portion end surface of the main branch portion of the proximal end side movable body 752 is opposed to the opposing surface 752g facing the lower end portion end surface of the main branch portion of the distal end side movable body 753 when the joint portion J is extended. A first regulating contact surface 752h that slopes downward from 752g to the right side (left side when viewed from the rear side as shown in FIG. 40), and left side from the opposing surface 752g (from the rear side as shown in FIG. 40). When viewed, the second restricting contact surface 752i is inclined downward toward the right side.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the distal end side movable body 753 pivots in one direction (specifically, pivots counterclockwise when viewed from the rear side), the joint portion J bends, and the distal end side movable body When the end surface of the lower end portion of the main branch portion 753 comes into contact with the regulation contact surface (specifically, the first regulation contact surface 752h) of the base end side movable body 752, the rotation stops. At this time, the proximal end side movable body 752 and the distal end side movable body 753 are in a state of being urged by the urging member 754 so that the joint portion J extends.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, even when the distal end side movable body 753 is rotated in the other direction (specifically, rotated clockwise as viewed from the rear surface side), the joint portion J bends and the distal end side movable body is movable. When the end surface of the lower end portion of the main branch portion of the body 753 comes into contact with the restriction contact surface (specifically, the second restriction contact surface 752i) of the base end side movable body 752, the rotation stops. Also in this case, the proximal end side movable body 752 and the distal end side movable body 753 are biased by the biasing member 754 so that the joint portion J extends.

  43 and 44 show the relationship among the unit base member 710, the drive mechanism 720, and the permanent magnet 730. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the unit base member 710, the drive mechanism 720, and the permanent magnet 730 as seen from the rear side. 44A is a front view showing a state in which the drive mechanism portion 720 and the permanent magnet 730 are attached to the unit base member 710, and FIG. 44B shows the drive mechanism portion 720 and the unit base member 710. It is sectional drawing which looked at the state equipped with the permanent magnet 730 from the upper surface side.

The proximal end side movable body 752 is rotatable with respect to the unit base member 710.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, the rotation shaft pin 752d is located on the rear side of the main branch portion of the base end side movable body 752 on the lower end side from the center in the extending direction of the main branch portion. Projected toward. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (a), a bearing having a through-hole through which the rotation shaft pin 752d can be inserted in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the rotation shaft pin 752d in the unit base member 710. A portion 710b is provided. That is, the base-side movable body 752 is configured to be pivotally supported (attached) to the unit base member 710 by inserting the rotation shaft pin 752d into the bearing portion 710b of the unit base member 710 from the front. Thereby, the base end side movable body 752 is rotatable with respect to the unit base member 710.
In this embodiment, in order to prevent friction and wear between the rotation shaft pin 752d of the base end side movable body 752 and the bearing portion 710b of the unit base member 710, the rotation shaft pin 752d has a bush (lubricant). Member) 701 (see FIG. 38).

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, a guide pin 752e projects toward the rear side on the upper end side of the main branch portion of the base side movable body 752 from the center in the extending direction of the main branch portion. Has been. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (a), the unit base member 710 can be slidably engaged with the guide pin 752e at a position corresponding to the guide pin 752e (specifically, the guide pin 752e). As a guide hole 710c (which can be inserted through 752e), a long elongated hole is provided along the trajectory of the guide pin 752e accompanying the rotation of the proximal end side movable body 752. That is, the guide pin 752e and the guide hole 710c are configured such that the guide pin 752e can be slid along the guide hole 710c to assist the rotation operation of the base end side movable body 752 with respect to the unit base member 710. .
In this embodiment, in order to prevent friction and wear between the guide pin 752e and the like of the base end side movable body 752 and the guide hole 710c and the like of the unit base member 710, a bush (lubricating member) 702 ( 38).

  As shown in FIG. 43, the drive mechanism unit 720 mainly includes a drive source (motor) 721 that can generate a drive force for rotating the proximal end side movable body 752, and a drive source 721. A main drive gear 722 fixed to the drive shaft, a driven gear (drive gear) 723 that meshes with the main drive gear 722, and a position detection sensor 724 for detecting the position of the base end side movable body 752 are configured. .

The driven gear 723 is inserted into a through hole 723a provided at the center of the driven gear 723 by inserting a rotating shaft pin 710d projecting rearward at a predetermined position of the unit base member 710 from the front. The base member 710 is configured to be pivotally attached. Thereby, the driven gear 723 can be rotated (rotated) with respect to the unit base member 710.
As shown in FIG. 38, an engagement pin 723b is projected from the front surface of the driven gear 723 toward the front side at a position eccentric from the through hole 723a. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (a), the unit base member 710 can be slidably engaged with the engagement pin 723b at a position corresponding to the engagement pin 723b (specifically, As a guide hole 710e through which the engagement pin 723b can be inserted, a long elongated hole is provided along the track of the engagement pin 723b accompanying the rotation of the driven gear 723. In other words, the engagement pin 723b and the guide hole 710e are configured to assist the rotation operation of the driven gear 723 with respect to the unit base member 710 by the sliding movement of the engagement pin 723b along the guide hole 710e.

The driven gear 723 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive source 721 mounted on the unit base member 710 while being pivotally attached to the unit base member 710 (specifically, the rotation shaft pin 710d). 722 is engaged. Further, the engagement pin 723b of the driven gear 723 protrudes toward the front side of the unit base member 710 through the guide hole 710e, and is provided at the lower end portion of the main branch portion of the base end side movable body 752 on the front side. The elongated hole-like engagement hole 752f (see FIG. 39) is slidably engaged (in the present embodiment, slidably inserted).
Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive source 721 rotates, the main driving gear 722 rotates, and accordingly, the driven gear 723 that meshes with the main driving gear 722, the engagement pin 723b of the driven gear 723, and the engagement hole 752f. The base end side movable body 752 engaged with each other is configured to rotate.
In this embodiment, in order to prevent friction and wear between the engagement pin 723b of the driven gear 723 and the guide hole 710e of the unit base member 710, the engagement hole 752f of the base end side movable body 752, and the like. A bush (lubricating member) 703 (see FIG. 38) is attached to the mating pin 723b.

Here, as shown in FIG. 43, on the side surface of the driven gear 723, a light shielding plate 723c that can be inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 724 protrudes outward.
Specifically, the light shielding plate 723c projects to a position on the side surface of the driven gear 723 that is inserted between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the position detection sensor 724 at the initial rotation position of the base end side movable body 752. It is installed. Thus, the position detection sensor 724 can detect whether or not the proximal end side movable body 752 is in the initial rotation position.

The distal end side movable body 753 can be attracted to the permanent magnet 730 housed in the magnet housing portion 710a of the unit base member 710.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the distal end side movable body 753 (in the present embodiment, the distal end portion of one side branch of the side branches extending from the main branch toward the right side) has a metal pin (soft magnetic). Body) 753c protrudes toward the rear side. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), at the position corresponding to the metal pin 753c in the unit base member 710, the rear surface protrudes from the surface (front surface) of the unit base member 710 toward the front side. An open concave chamber-shaped magnet storage portion 710a is provided. That is, when the metal pin 753c of the distal-side movable body 753 enters the range where the magnetic force of the permanent magnet 730 housed in the magnet housing portion 710a of the unit base member 710 enters, the metal pin 753c becomes the side wall of the magnet housing portion 710a. It is comprised so that magnetic force adsorption | suction may be carried out to the permanent magnet 730 via (pinch).
Here, the metal pin 753c constitutes a magnetic body (soft magnetic body) provided at a position away from the joint portion J of the distal end side movable body 753 (second movable body), and the permanent magnet 730 is connected to the metal pin 753c. It forms an attracting part (hard magnetic material) capable of magnetically attracting.

In the present embodiment, the permanent magnet 730 is configured to be pressed and held by the magnet pressing member 740 in order to maintain the state in which the permanent magnet 730 is stored in the magnet storage portion 710a.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (b), a cylindrical screw-fixing boss 710a1 extending in the front-rear direction around the opening of the magnet storage portion 710a on the inner surface of the unit base member 710, A protruding positioning protrusion 710a2 is provided. On the other hand, a screw hole 740a that penetrates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the screw boss 710a1 in the magnet pressing member 740, and a penetration that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the positioning protrusion 710a2. A hole 740b is provided. Then, the magnet pressing member 740 is disposed behind the permanent magnet 730 stored in the magnet storage portion 710a, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 740b with a screw (not shown) of the magnet pressing member 740. By inserting the screw boss 710a1 of the unit base member 710 from the rear through the screw hole 740a of the magnet pressing member, the magnet pressing member 740 can be fixed to the unit base member 710 while being positioned in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. It is configured as follows. Thereby, the permanent magnet 730 is pressed and held, and the permanent magnet 730 is prevented from being detached from the magnet storage portion 710a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45 to FIG. 49, an effect operation by the side effect unit 700 will be described.
45 is a perspective view of the side effect unit 700 viewed from the front side when the movable decorative member 750 is in a normal state. 46 is a front view of the side effect unit 700 when the movable decorative member 750 is in a normal state, and FIG. 47 is a front view of the side effect unit 700 when the movable decorative member 750 is in the first operation state. 48 is a front view, FIG. 48 is a front view of the side effect unit 700 when the movable decorative member 750 is in the second operation state, and FIG. 49 is a case where the movable decorative member 750 is in the third operation state. It is a front view of the side effect unit 700.
Here, in FIG. 45, illustration of the unit base member 710 is omitted. 45 to 49, illustration of the front decoration member 751 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the movable decorative member 750 is in a normal state, the joint portion J is extended, and the proximal end side movable body 752 and the distal end side movable body 753 are serially arranged in the vertical direction. The metal pins 753c of the distal end side movable body 753 are magnetically attracted to the permanent magnet 730 via (side through) the side wall of the magnet storage portion 710a. Although not shown, the light shielding plate 723 c of the driven gear 723 is inserted between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the position detection sensor 724 and detected by the position detection sensor 724.
That is, in the normal state, the movable decorative member 750 (movable effect member) has the proximal end side movable body 752 (first movable body) and the distal end side movable body 753 (second movable body) arranged in series in the vertical direction. In this state, the metal pin 753c (magnetic body) and the permanent magnet 730 (attracting portion) are magnetically attracted.

When the driven gear 723 of the drive mechanism unit 720 rotates, the proximal end side movable body 752 rotates in a predetermined direction (in the present embodiment, the counterclockwise direction). As shown in FIG. 47, when the rotation angle of the driven gear 723 is less than a predetermined threshold value, the metal pin 753c of the distal end side movable body 753 is magnetically attracted to the permanent magnet 730 via (side) the side wall of the magnet housing portion 710a. The proximal end side movable body 752 rotates as it is. As a result, the distal end side movable body 753 rotates relative to the proximal end side movable body 752 in a direction opposite to the rotational direction of the proximal end side movable body 752 (clockwise direction in this embodiment). Thus, the joint J is bent.
In other words, the joint portion J exceeds a predetermined threshold value (beyond the urging force of the urging member 754) by operating the base end side movable body 752 (first movable body) (in the case of this embodiment, rotating). When a bending force is applied, the distal end side movable body 753 (second movable body) is configured to perform a different operation from the proximal end side movable body 752 around the joint portion J.
In this case, since the base end side movable body 752 is operating in a state where the metal pin 753c (magnetic body) and the permanent magnet 730 (attracting portion) are magnetically attracted, a bending force exceeding a threshold is applied to the joint portion J. Yes.

  Therefore, for example, when the rotation angle of the driven gear 723 is set within a range less than a predetermined threshold and the rotation and reversal of the driven gear 723 are alternately repeated (that is, the normal operation (see FIGS. 45 and 46) and the first operation) (Alternately converted to the state (see FIG. 47)), the joint J is bent and extended while maintaining the state in which the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are magnetically attracted, so that the branches of the cherry tree sway gently. It is possible to perform such an effect.

When the driven gear 723 of the drive mechanism unit 720 further rotates and the rotation angle of the driven gear 723 becomes a predetermined threshold value or more, as shown in FIG. Is canceled. As a result, the distal-side movable body 753 is moved relative to the proximal-side movable body 752 by the centrifugal force generated by the rotation of the proximal-side movable body 752 or the urging force of the urging member 754. Rotate in the same direction as the rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in the case of the present embodiment), and the joint portion J extends.
That is, when the base end side movable body 752 (first movable body) is operated beyond the predetermined operation width in a state where the metal pin 753c (magnetic body) and the permanent magnet 730 (attracting portion) are magnetically attracted, The adsorbed state of 753c and the permanent magnet 730 is released, and the joint portion J is released from the bending force.

When the movable decorative member 750 is in the second operation state (the joint portion J is in the extended state and the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are not attracted by magnetic force), the drive mechanism portion 720 is driven. When the rotation of the gear 723 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 49, the rotation of the proximal-side movable body 752 is stopped. However, the distal-side movable body 753 is driven by the momentum of the operation up to that point (ie, inertia). The rotation continues until the end surface of the lower end portion of the main branch portion of the side movable body 753 abuts on the restriction contact surface (specifically, the second restriction contact surface 752i) of the base end side movable body 752. As a result, the joint J is bent. At this time, the proximal-side movable body 752 and the distal-side movable body 753 are urged so that the joint portion J extends by the urging member 754, but the urging member 754 is caused by the weight of the distal-side movable body 753. The joint portion J does not return to the state in which the joint portion J extends against the urging force, and the joint portion J remains bent.
Therefore, for example, when a transition is made from the first operation state (see FIG. 47) to the third operation state (see FIG. 49) through the second operation state (see FIG. 48), a cherry tree branch is formed. It is possible to produce an effect.

In addition, when the movable decorative member 750 is in the second operation state (the joint portion J is in an extended state and the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are not attracted by magnetic force), the drive mechanism portion 720 is operated. In addition to the case where the rotation of the driven gear 723 is stopped and the rotation of the proximal end side movable body 752 is stopped, the driven gear 723 is reversed to reverse the proximal end side movable body 752 (in the case of this embodiment, Even when the distal end side movable body 753 is rotated in the direction of rotation, the distal end side movable body 753 rotates in a direction opposite to the reverse direction of the proximal end side movable body 752 with respect to the proximal end side movable body 752 due to inertia. Part J is bent. Also in this case, the proximal end side movable body 752 and the distal end side movable body 753 are urged so that the joint portion J extends by the urging member 754, but the urging member is caused by the weight of the distal end side movable body 753 and the like. The joint J does not return to the extended state against the urging force of 754, and the joint J remains bent.
That is, by operating the base end side movable body 752 (first movable body) (in the case of this embodiment, a stop operation or a reverse operation), the joint portion J exceeds a predetermined threshold (the biasing force of the biasing member 754 is increased). When a bending force is applied, the distal end side movable body 753 (second movable body) is configured to perform an operation different from the proximal end side movable body 752 around the joint portion J.
In this case, since the operation of the proximal end side movable body 752 (first movable body) is stopped or reversed in a state where the metal pin 753c (magnetic body) and the permanent magnet 730 (attracting portion) are not magnetically attracted, A bending force exceeding a threshold value is applied to the joint portion J due to the weight of at least the distal end side movable body 753 (second movable body).

  In the present embodiment, the distal end side movable body 753 and the proximal end side movable body 752 are connected by a rotation shaft (connection pin 753a) to form the joint portion J, and the distal end side movable body 753 is moved to the proximal end side. Although it is configured to rotate in the left-right direction with respect to the body 752, the configuration of the joint portion J is not limited to this. For example, the distal-side movable body 753 can be configured to rotate in the front-rear direction with respect to the proximal-side movable body 752, and the distal-side movable body 753 and the proximal-side movable body 752 can be configured as a sphere or the like. It is also possible to constitute the joint portion J by connecting the distal end side movable body 753 with respect to the proximal end side movable body 752 in an arbitrary direction.

  In the present embodiment, the base-side movable body 752 is configured to rotate with respect to the unit base member 710. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable decorative member 750 is in a normal state (the joint portion J is In the extended state, the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are magnetically attracted, and in the first operation state (the joint J is bent), and the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are A magnetic force adsorption state), a second operation state (a state where the joint portion J is extended, and the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are not magnetically attracted), and a third operation state (the joint portion J). Can be changed to a state in which the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are not attracted by magnetic force), for example, the base end side movable body 752 is slurried with respect to the unit base member 710. It is also possible to configure so as to de move.

FIG. 50 shows the detailed structure of the effect mechanism unit (back surface component) 1000. FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering mechanism unit 1000 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 50, the production mechanism unit 1000 is mainly composed of a control base 1100 having a concave shape in the front opening and a substantially rectangular shape in front view (substantially rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction), and the front side of the control base 1100. The lower movable unit 1200 mounted on the lower part from the front, the shutter unit 1500 mounted on the front side of the control base 1100 from the upper side of the lower movable unit 1200, and the control base 1100 disposed in front of the shutter unit 1500. A winning ball falling member 1900 mounted on the front side is provided.
Here, the movable effect device provided with the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) capable of converting the effect mechanism unit 1000 into a shielded state that shields the display region R of the display device 41 and a released state that releases the shield. Make.

The control base 1100 is provided with a rectangular display window 1100a as an opening for exposing the display surface (display region R) of the display device 41 included in the effect control unit 500 mounted on the rear surface of the effect mechanism unit 1000. ing.
The winning ball descending member 1900 is made of a translucent material that can transmit light, and communicates with the winning ball outlet port of the winning ball passage member 470 (see FIG. 16) (or the winning ball guide). The winning ball introduction port 1900a (opposite the exit and the game ball with a distance less than the diameter) communicates with one winning ball introduction port of the ball flow downstream unit 900 (see FIG. 3) (or the one winning ball) A flow path member for guiding a game ball from the winning ball passage member 470 to the ball flow downstream unit 900, which has a winning ball outlet port 1900b (facing the inlet and the game ball at a distance less than the diameter). is there.

FIG. 51 shows a detailed structure of the lower movable unit 1200. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the lower movable unit 1200 as seen from the front side.
FIG. 52 shows the detailed structure of the decoration guide unit 1300. 52A is a perspective view of the decoration guide unit 1300 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 52B is a right side view of the decoration guide unit 1300.
As shown in FIG. 51, the lower movable unit 1200 mainly includes a decoration guide unit 1300 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and a decoration guide unit 1300 (in the case of the present embodiment, a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the decoration guide unit 1300). The movable unit space 1300a (see FIG. 52) provided in the stage is provided with an effect movable unit 1400 mounted from the rear.

  The decoration guide unit 1300 is a unit for guiding the shutter operation of the shutter unit 1500. As shown in FIG. 51, the decoration guide unit 1300 mainly includes a left guide base 1310L and a right guide base 1310R that are mirror images of each other, and a mirror image of each other. The left back side shutter guide 1320L and the right back side shutter guide 1320R mounted on the front side of the left guide base 1310L and the right guide base 1310R, respectively, have a mirror image relationship with each other, and the left guide base 1310L and the right guide base 1310L The left decorative cover 1330L and the right decorative cover 1330R mounted on the front side of the guide base 1310R from the front of the left back shutter guide 1320L and the right back shutter guide 1320R respectively have a mirror image relationship with each other, and the left decorative cover 1330L And a left decorative member 1340L and a right decorative member 1340R mounted on the front side of the right decorative cover 1330R, respectively, form one rail side by side in the left-right direction, and are provided on the front side of the left guide base 1310L and the right guide base 1310R. Of these, a left back shutter guide 1320L and a plurality of front shutter guides 1350 mounted on the front side of the right back shutter guide 1320R are provided.

As shown in FIG. 51, the right guide base 1310R is a member elongated in the left-right direction, and has a horizontal wall 1311 having a notch 1311a for forming a movable unit space 1300a, and a rear end portion of the horizontal wall 1311. And a hanging wall 1313 that hangs down from the front end of the horizontal wall 1311.
Similarly, the left guide base 1310L is a member that is long in the left-right direction, and has a horizontal wall 1311 having a notch 1311a for forming the movable unit space 1300a, and a standing wall that stands from the rear end of the horizontal wall 1311. 1312 and a hanging wall 1313 hanging from the front end of the horizontal wall 1311.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 (b), the right back shutter guide 1320R is a long member in the left-right direction having a guide groove 1320a extending in the left-right direction. Guides the sliding operation of a shutter unit 1730 (described later).
Similarly, the left back shutter guide 1320L is a member that is long in the left-right direction and has a guide groove 1320a extending in the left-right direction. To do.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the right decorative cover 1330R is a member that is long in the left-right direction, and is placed on the horizontal wall 1311 of the right guide base 1310R. A right back shutter guide 1320R attached to the front surface of the upright wall 1312 of the right guide base 1310R can be covered from the front and left sides. Between the upper end portion of the right decorative cover 1330R and the upper end portion of the upright wall 1312 of the right guide base 1310R, a guide receiving opening 1300b capable of receiving the lower end side of the right rear shutter unit 1730 (described later) is formed. Yes. Further, the right decorative cover 1330R conceals (shields) a screw hole or the like provided in the right decorative cover 1330R (a screw hole or the like provided for screwing the right decorative cover 1330R to the right guide base 1310R). In order to do so, the right decorative member 1340R is mounted from the front.
Similarly, the left decorative cover 1330L is a member that is long in the left-right direction, and is mounted on the left guide base 1310L in a state of being placed on the horizontal wall 1311 of the left guide base 1310L, and the left guide base 1310L The left rear shutter guide 1320L mounted on the front surface of the upright wall 1312 can be covered from the front and right sides. Between the upper end portion of the left decorative cover 1330L and the upper end portion of the standing wall 1312 of the left guide base 1310L, a guide receiving opening 1300b that can receive the lower end side of the left rear shutter unit 1630 (described later) is formed. Yes. Further, the left decorative cover 1330L conceals (shields) a screw hole or the like provided in the left decorative cover 1330L (a screw hole or the like provided to screw the left decorative cover 1330L to the left guide base 1310L). In order to do this, the left decorative member 1340L is mounted from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 (b), the front shutter guide 1350 is a member elongated in the left-right direction having a guide groove 1350a extending in the left-right direction, and the left front shutter unit is formed by the guide groove 1350a. Guides the slide operation of 1650 (described later) and the right front shutter unit 1750 (described later). Each front shutter guide 1350 is mounted on the front surface of the hanging wall 1313 of the left guide base 1310L or the right guide base 1310R.
In the case of this embodiment, there are two types of lengths of the front shutter guide 1350, and the shorter front shutter guide 1350 is on the left side of the front surface of the hanging wall 1313 of the left guide base 1310L from the substantially horizontal center. And the longer front shutter guide 1350 is attached to the front side of the hanging wall 1313 of the left guide base 1310L. The left guide base 1310L and the right guide base 1310R are connected across a portion on the right side of the substantially horizontal center of the left and right sides and a portion of the front surface of the hanging wall 1313 of the right guide base 1310R on the left side of the substantially horizontal center. It is installed to do.

FIG. 53 shows the detailed structure of the effect movable unit 1400. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect movable unit 1400 viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 53, the effect movable unit 1400 is mainly disposed between the movable unit 1410, the drive unit 1420 disposed behind the movable unit 1410, and the movable unit 1410 and the drive unit 1420. A mechanism portion 1430 that connects the movable portion 1410 and the drive portion 1420 is provided.
Here, the movable part 1410 forms a movable effect member capable of performing an effect operation.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the mechanism unit 1430 is long in the vertical direction, and mainly includes a slider 1431, a movable unit side bearing unit 1432 mounted on the front side of the slider 1431, and a movable unit side bearing unit 1432. And a base side bearing unit 1434 attached to the rear surface side of the slider 1431 and a base side slide rail 1435 attached to the base side bearing unit 1434 from the rear. Composed.

54 and 55 show the detailed structure of the movable portion 1410. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the movable portion 1410 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the movable portion 1410 viewed from the rear side. In FIG. 55, the motor cover 1419 is not shown.
The movable portion 1410 is long in the vertical direction, and is attached to the drive portion 1420 via the mechanism portion 1430 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the movable portion 1410 mainly includes a movable base 1411 provided with a rack portion 1411a on one side surface (right side surface in the case of the present embodiment) and a front surface of the movable base 1411. A decoration member 1412 mounted across the vertical center and lower part, an LED board 1413 mounted on the upper front surface of the movable base 1411, and the LED board 1413 mounted on the movable base 1411 from the front of the LED board 1413. A substrate holding member 1413H for supporting the effect, an effect movable member 1414 mounted on the top of the movable base 1411 from the front, a light diffusion diffusion sheet 1415 disposed on the rear side of the effect movable member 1414, and an effect movable member 1414H is a sheet pressing member 1415H that is attached to the back 1414 from behind the diffusion sheet 1415 and supports the diffusion sheet 1415. , A drive source (motor) 1416 mounted on the upper part of the movable base 1411 from the rear, a main drive gear (worm) 1417 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive source 1416, and the main drive gear 1417 on the rear surface side of the movable base 1411 And a motor cover 1419 mounted on the movable base 1411 from behind the drive source 1416, the main drive gear 1417, and the driven gear 1418.
As shown in FIG. 55, the movable portion side slide rail 1433 of the mechanism portion 1430 is attached to the rail mounting portion 1411b provided across the center portion and the lower portion in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the movable base 1411. .

The effect movable member 1414 is formed of a translucent material that can transmit light, and the front surface of the effect movable member 1414 is decorated with cherry blossoms or the like by uneven processing or the like.
Further, the substrate pressing member 1413H, the sheet pressing member 1415H, and the diffusion sheet 1415 are also formed of a translucent material. The LED board 1413 disposed behind the effect movable member 1414 via the board pressing member 1413H, the sheet pressing member 1415H, and the diffusion sheet 1415 is placed on the LED board 1413 (specifically, the LED board 1413 LED is provided on the front surface, and the effect movable member 1414 may appear to be shining by the light irradiated from the LED substrate 1413 and transmitted through the substrate pressing member 1413H, the sheet pressing member 1415H, and the diffusion sheet 1415. It is configured to be able to.

The effect movable member 1414 is rotatable with respect to the movable base 1411.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55, the effect movable member 1414 is provided with a rotating shaft 1414a that protrudes rearward from the center of the effect movable member 1414. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54, a through hole 1411c through which the rotary shaft 1414a can be inserted in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the rotary shaft 1414a in the movable base 1411. That is, the effect movable member 1414 is configured to be pivotally supported (mounted) on the movable base 1411 by inserting the rotating shaft 1414a into the through hole 1411c of the movable base 1411 from the front. Thereby, the effect movable member 1414 is rotatable with respect to the movable base 1411.

The driven gear 1418 moves the rotation shaft 1414a of the effect movable member 1414 projecting to the rear surface side of the movable base 1411 through the through hole 1411a provided in the center of the driven gear 1418 through the through hole 1411c of the movable base 1411. It is comprised so that it may be fixed to the production movable member 1414 by inserting. The driven gear 1418 is configured so that it cannot rotate with respect to the effect movable member 1414 and can rotate integrally with the effect movable member 1414, that is, can rotate together with the effect movable member 1414.
When the drive shaft of the drive source 1416 rotates, the main driving gear (worm) 1417 fixed to the driving shaft rotates, and accordingly, the driven gear 1418 meshing with the main driving gear 1417 and the driven gear 1418 An effect movable member 1414 that rotates together is configured to rotate.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, it is possible to prevent the effect movable member 1414 from being detached from the movable base 1411 by attaching a retaining metal fitting 1410 a to the tip end portion of the rotation shaft 1414 a of the effect movable member 1414. In addition, the driven gear 1418 is configured to be prevented from coming off the rotating shaft 1414a.

56 and 57 show the detailed structure of the drive unit 1420. FIG. FIG. 56 is an exploded perspective view of the drive unit 1420 as seen from the front side. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the drive unit 1420 as seen from the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the drive unit 1420 mainly includes a drive base 1421, a main drive gear 1422, a first driven gear 1423, and a second driven gear 1424 mounted on the front side of the drive base 1421. A gear pressing member 1422H that is mounted on the drive base 1421 from the front of the main driving gear 1422, the first driven gear 1423, and the second driven gear 1424 and supports the main driving gear 1422, the first driven gear 1423, and the second driven gear 1424; A sensor substrate 1425a (a substrate on which the position detection sensor 1425 is attached) mounted on a substrate attachment portion 1421a provided on the front surface of the base 1421 (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper left side of the front surface), and the drive base 1421 A substrate pressing member 1 that is mounted from the front of the sensor substrate 1425a and supports the sensor substrate 1425a. And 25H, (in this embodiment, the upper right side of the rear surface side) rear side of the driving base 1421 configured with a drive source mounted on a (motor) 1426.
A base-side slide rail 1435 of the mechanism unit 1430 is attached to the rail attachment portion 1421b provided across the vertical center and the lower portion of the front surface of the drive base 1421.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the drive base 1421 has a shaft hole 1421c through which the drive shaft 1426a can be inserted in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the drive shaft 1426a of the drive source 1426 mounted on the rear surface side of the drive base 1421. I have. The main drive gear 1422 is configured to be fixed to the drive shaft 1426a of the drive source 1426 protruding to the front side of the drive base 1421 through the shaft hole 1421c of the drive base 1421 on the front side.

The first driven gear 1423 is inserted through a through hole 1423a provided at the center of the first driven gear 1423 with a first rotating shaft pin 1421d protruding from the rear at a predetermined position of the drive base 1421. Thus, the drive base 1421 is configured to be pivotally attached. Accordingly, the first driven gear 1423 can be rotated (rotated) with respect to the drive base 1421.
Similarly, the second driven gear 1424 is a second rotating shaft pin that protrudes forward in a predetermined position of the drive base 1421 in a through hole 1424a provided in the center of the second driven gear 1424. By inserting 1421e from the rear, it is configured to be pivotally attached to the drive base 1421. As a result, the second driven gear 1424 can be rotated (rotated) with respect to the drive base 1421.

  As shown in FIG. 57, at least the second driven gear 1424 is provided in a state where the main driving gear 1422, the first driven gear 1423, and the second driven gear 1424 are mounted on the drive base 1421 and held by the gear pressing member 1422H. Some of the plurality of teeth thus formed are exposed to the outside of the gear pressing member 1422H through an opening provided on the side surface (the left side surface in this embodiment) of the gear pressing member 1422H on the rail mounting portion 1421b side. It is configured to protrude and be exposed. The second driven gear 1424 is configured to mesh with a rack portion 1411a provided on the movable base 1411 of the movable portion 1410 outside the gear pressing member 1422H.

In other words, the first driven gear 1423 is fixed to the drive shaft 1426a of the drive source 1426 on the front side of the drive base 1421 in a state of being pivotally attached to the drive base 1421 (specifically, the first rotation shaft pin 1421d). The main driven gear 1422 is engaged with the second driven gear 1424 attached to the drive base 1421 (specifically, the second rotation shaft pin 1421e).
Further, the second driven gear 1424 is pivotally attached to the drive base 1421 (specifically, the second rotation shaft pin 1421e), and the drive base 1421 (specifically, the first rotation shaft pin 1421d). ) And the rack portion 1411a of the movable portion 1410 disposed in front of the drive portion 1420.
When the drive shaft 1426a of the drive source 1426 rotates, the main driving gear 1422 fixed to the driving shaft 1426a rotates, and accordingly, the first driven gear 1423 meshing with the main driving gear 1422 and the first driven gear The second driven gear 1424 that meshes with the gear 1423 rotates, and the movable portion 1410 having the rack portion 1411a that meshes with the second driven gear 1424 moves in the direction in which the rack portion 1411a extends (i.e., the drive portion 1420). It is configured to slide in the vertical direction.

FIG. 58 shows the detailed structure of the mechanism unit 1430. FIG. 58A is an exploded perspective view of the mechanism unit 1430 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 58B is a top view of the mechanism unit 1430.
As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the movable portion side slide rail 1433 is a concave (cross-sectionally U-shaped) member that is long in the vertical direction and has an open rear surface, and the base side slide rail 1435 is in the vertical direction. These are long (indented U-shaped) members whose front faces are open, and are mirror images of each other.
As shown in FIGS. 58A and 58B, the slider in which the length in the vertical direction is set shorter than the slide rails 1433 and 1435 between the movable portion side slide rail 1433 and the base side slide rail 1435. 1431 is disposed. Between the slider 1431 and the movable part side slide rail 1433, a movable part side bearing unit 1432 whose vertical length is set shorter than the slider 1431 is disposed, and the slider 1431 and the base side slide rail 1435 are disposed. A base-side bearing unit 1434 having a length in the vertical direction shorter than that of the slider 1431 is disposed between the two.

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the movable part side bearing unit 1432 is disposed between the front surface of the slider 1431 and the bottom portion of the inner surface of the movable part side slide rail 1433 and substantially abuts against the front surface of the slider 1431. A wall portion, a left wall portion that protrudes rearward from the left end portion of the contact wall portion and is disposed between the left side surface of the slider 1431 and the left side portion of the inner surface of the movable portion side slide rail 1433, The right wall portion protrudes from the right end portion of the contact wall portion toward the rear side and is disposed between the right side surface of the slider 1431 and the right side portion of the inner surface of the movable portion side slide rail 1433.
As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the movable part side bearing unit 1432 is provided on both the left wall part and the right wall part of the movable part side bearing unit 1432. A plurality of balls 1432a lined up along are attached rotatably.

Similarly, the base-side bearing unit 1434 is disposed between the rear surface of the slider 1431 and the bottom portion of the inner surface of the base-side slide rail 1435, and substantially contacts the rear surface of the slider 1431; A left wall portion protruding from the left end portion toward the front side and disposed between the left side surface of the slider 1431 and the left side portion of the inner surface of the base side slide rail 1435, and protruding from the right end portion of the contact wall portion toward the front side. It consists of a right wall disposed between the right side of the slider 1431 and the right side of the inner surface of the base side slide rail 1435.
A plurality of balls 1434a arranged along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the base side bearing unit 1434 are rotatably mounted on both the left wall portion and the right wall portion of the base side bearing unit 1434. .

The movable part side slide rail 1433 is slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the slider 1431.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), a portion of the inner surface of the movable portion side slide rail 1433 facing the left wall portion of the movable portion side bearing unit 1432 (that is, the left portion of the inner surface), A ball support groove 1433a that can be engaged with the ball 1432a of the movable part side bearing unit 1432 is movable on both the part facing the right wall part of the movable part side bearing unit 1432 (that is, the right side part of the inner surface). It is provided along the longitudinal direction of the part-side slide rail 1433 (that is, the vertical direction). The movable portion side bearing unit 1432 is engaged with each ball 1432a mounted on the left wall portion of the movable portion side bearing unit 1432 and the ball support groove 1433a on the left side of the movable portion side slide rail 1433, and Each ball 1432a mounted on the right wall portion of the movable unit side bearing unit 1432 is mounted on the movable unit side slide rail 1433 such that the ball support groove 1433a on the right side of the movable unit side slide rail 1433 engages. . Thereby, the movable part side bearing unit 1432 is mounted on the movable part side slide rail 1433 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.
On the other hand, a portion of the slider 1431 that faces the left wall portion of the movable portion side bearing unit 1432 (ie, a front end portion of the left side surface of the slider 1431) and a portion that faces the right wall portion of the movable portion side bearing unit 1432 (ie, the front portion) The front ball support groove 1431a that can be engaged with the ball 1432a of the movable unit side bearing unit 1432 extends along the longitudinal direction (that is, the vertical direction) of the slider 1431. Is provided. The movable portion side bearing unit 1432 is engaged with each ball 1432a mounted on the left wall portion of the movable portion side bearing unit 1432 and the front ball support groove 1431a on the left side of the slider 1431, and on the movable portion side. Each ball 1432a mounted on the right wall portion of the bearing unit 1432 is mounted on the slider 1431 so that the front ball support groove 1431a on the right side of the slider 1431 is engaged. Thus, the movable part side bearing unit 1432 is mounted on the slider 1431 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.
Therefore, when the movable part side bearing unit 1432 is mounted on both the slider 1431 and the movable part side slide rail 1433 via the ball 1432a, the movable part side slide rail 1433 is connected via the movable part side bearing unit 1432. The slider 1431 is mounted so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

Further, the slider 1431 is slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the base side slide rail 1435.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58B, a portion of the slider 1431 facing the left wall portion of the base-side bearing unit 1434 (that is, the rear end portion of the left side surface of the slider 1431) and the base-side bearing. A rear ball support groove 1431b that can be engaged with the ball 1434a of the base side bearing unit 1434 is provided on both the portion facing the right wall portion of the unit 1434 (that is, the rear end portion of the right side surface of the slider 1431). The slider 1431 is provided along the longitudinal direction (that is, the vertical direction). The base-side bearing unit 1434 is engaged with each ball 1434a mounted on the left wall portion of the base-side bearing unit 1434 and the rear-side ball support groove 1431b on the left side of the slider 1431. Each ball 1434a mounted on the right wall of 1434 and the rear ball support groove 1431b on the right side of the slider 1431 are engaged with the slider 1431. Accordingly, the base-side bearing unit 1434 is mounted on the slider 1431 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.
On the other hand, of the inner surface of the base-side slide rail 1435, the portion facing the left wall portion of the base-side bearing unit 1434 (that is, the left portion of the inner surface) and the portion facing the right wall portion of the base-side bearing unit 1434 (that is, the portion) , A ball support groove 1435a that can be engaged with the ball 1434a of the base side bearing unit 1434 is provided along the longitudinal direction (that is, the vertical direction) of the base side slide rail 1435. It has been. In the base side bearing unit 1434, each ball 1434a mounted on the left wall portion of the base side bearing unit 1434 engages with the ball support groove 1435a on the left side of the base side slide rail 1435, and the base side bearing unit 1434 is engaged. Each ball 1434a mounted on the right wall portion of the unit 1434 is mounted on the base side slide rail 1435 so that the ball support groove 1435a on the right side of the base side slide rail 1435 is engaged. Accordingly, the base-side bearing unit 1434 is mounted on the base-side slide rail 1435 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.
Therefore, when the base side bearing unit 1434 is mounted on both the slider 1431 and the base side slide rail 1435 via the ball 1434a, the slider 1431 is attached to the base side slide rail 1435 via the base side bearing unit 1434. On the other hand, it is slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, how the movable portion 1410 moves will be described.
59 is a perspective view of the rendering movable unit 1400 viewed from the rear side when the movable portion 1410 is in the initial position, and FIG. 60 is a position where the movable portion 1410 has moved upward from the initial position. It is the perspective view which looked at the production movable unit 1400 in a certain case from the back side. Here, in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, the drive base 1421 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the movable portion 1410 is in the initial position, the second driven gear (drive gear) 1424 of the drive portion 1420 meshes with the upper end side of the rack portion 1411a included in the movable portion 1410, and The length of the mechanism part 1430 is the shortest. At this time, a light-shielding plate 1411d (see FIG. 55) that protrudes rearward from the movable base 1411 of the movable portion 1410 is a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion of the position detection sensor 1425 on the sensor substrate 1425a included in the drive portion 1420. Is detected by the position detection sensor 1425. That is, the effect movable unit 1400 is configured so that the position detection sensor 1425 can detect whether or not the movable part 1410 is in the initial position.
Here, the vertical length of the rack portion 1411a is set to be longer than the vertical length of the movable portion side slide rail 1433 (that is, the vertical length of the base side slide rail 1435).

Then, when the drive shaft 1426a of the drive source 1426 of the drive unit 1420 is rotated and the second driven gear 1424 is rotated (in the case of the present embodiment, rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the rear surface side), the second A movable portion 1410 having a rack portion 1411 a meshing with the driven gear 1424 moves upward with respect to the drive portion 1420.
At this time, as described above, the vertical length of the rack portion 1411a is set longer than the vertical length of the movable portion side slide rail 1433. Therefore, in the mechanism portion 1430, for example, first, the movable portion side slide rail 1433 is movable. The movable part side slide rail 1433 attached to the part 1410 slides upward with respect to the slider 1431, and then the slider 1431 moves upward with respect to the base side slide rail 1435 attached to the drive part 1420. Move to slide. In this way, the mechanism unit 1430 assists the sliding movement of the movable unit 1410 with respect to the drive unit 1420.

  In the present embodiment, the drive base 1421 of the drive unit 1420 is provided with a diagram in order to further assist the sliding movement of the movable unit 1410 with respect to the drive unit 1420 and to guide the return operation of the movable unit 1410 to the initial position. As shown in 57, a guide rib 1421f that can be engaged with a rib 1411e (see FIG. 55) protruding from the movable portion 1410 protrudes toward the front side.

FIG. 61 shows a detailed structure of the shutter unit 1500. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the shutter unit 1500 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 61, the shutter unit 1500 mainly includes a left shutter unit 1600 and a right shutter unit 1700.
The left shutter unit 1600 mainly includes a left shutter drive unit 1610, a left back shutter unit 1630 suspended from the left shutter drive unit 1610, and a left shutter drive unit 1610 in front of the left back shutter unit 1630. A left front shutter unit 1650 is provided.
The right shutter unit 1700 mainly includes a right shutter driving unit 1710, a right rear shutter unit 1730 suspended from the right shutter driving unit 1710, and a right shutter unit disposed in front of the right rear shutter unit 1730. A right front shutter unit 1750 that is suspended from the drive unit 1710 is provided.

Here, the left shutter unit 1600 constitutes a first shielding member that shields one side of the display area R (left side in this embodiment), and the right shutter unit 1700 is the other side of the display area R (this embodiment). In this case, a second shielding member that shields the right side) is formed.
Further, the left back shutter unit 1630 and the right back shutter unit 1730 have no back side shielding member that shields a part (end side) of the display region R, and the left front shutter unit 1650 and the right front shutter unit 1750 are The left rear shutter unit 1630 and the right rear shutter unit 1730 are disposed in front of the left rear shutter unit 1630, and at least a portion (center side) different from the left rear shutter unit 1630 and the right rear shutter unit 1730 in the display region R. It serves as a front shielding member for shielding.

  The left shutter unit 1600 and the right shutter unit 1700 have substantially the same configuration, and the left shutter unit 1600 and the right shutter unit 1700 operate in line symmetry. The configuration of the shutter unit 1600 will be described, and the description of the configuration of the right shutter unit 1700 will be omitted.

FIG. 62 shows a detailed structure of the left shutter drive unit 1610. FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the left shutter driving unit 1610 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 62, the left shutter drive unit 1610 mainly has a left back side movable base 1611 that is long in the left-right direction and a long side in the left-right direction that is attached to the front side of the left back side movable base 1611. A left front movable base 1612, a drive source (motor) 1613 attached from the front to the left front movable base 1612 (in the case of this embodiment, the left part of the left front movable base 1612), and a drive source to the left front movable base 1612 A motor fixing member 1614 mounted from the front of 1613, a main driving gear 1615 fixed between the driving shaft of the driving source 1613 and disposed between the driving source 1613 and the left front movable base 1612; and a left front movable base 1612 (Specifically, the first rotation shaft pin 1612a projecting forward at a predetermined position of the left front movable base 1612) is attached to the main driving gear 1615. The first driven gear 1616 and the left front movable base 1612 (specifically, the second rotary shaft pin 1612b projecting forward from a predetermined position of the left front movable base 1612) are attached to the first. A second driven gear (drive gear) 1617 meshing with the driven gear 1616, a gear presser member 1618 mounted on the left front movable base 1612 from the front of the first driven gear 1616 and the second driven gear 1617, and a left rear movable On the front side of the left back side slide rail 1621 mounted on the front side of the base 1611 (in the case of this embodiment, straddling the central part and the right part in the left-right direction on the front side) and on the front side of the left front movable base 1612 (In the case of the present embodiment, the front left slide rail 1622 to be mounted (straddling the central portion and the left portion in the left-right direction on the front side) and the front side of the left back side movable base 1611 (this embodiment) In this case, the sensor base 1623 mounted on the left side of the front side) and the front side of the left back side movable base 1611 (in the case of the present embodiment, the left side of the front side of the front side) are mounted on the left front side. A sensor guide member 1624 that connects the base 1612 and the sensor base 1623, and a position detection sensor 1625 that is mounted on the sensor base 1623 from below are configured.

FIG. 63 shows a detailed structure of the left rear shutter unit 1630. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the left back shutter unit 1630 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 63, the left back shutter unit 1630 is mainly long in the left-right direction and attached to the rear side of the left back slide base 1631 that is long in the left-right direction and the left back slide base 1631. Left back side slider 1632, left back side bearing unit 1633 mounted on the left back side slider 1632 from the back, and left back side shutter base 1634 that is vertically extended on the left back side slide base 1631. An LED substrate 1635 disposed on the rear surface side of the left back shutter base 1634, and a left back side back box member 1636 that is mounted on the left back shutter base 1634 from behind the LED substrate 1635 and supports the LED substrate 1635. And an engagement receiving member 1637 attached to the left back side shutter base 1634 from the front.

The left back side shutter base 1634 has a concave chamber shape whose rear surface is open, and includes a mounting flange portion 1634a that protrudes upward from the front end portion of the upper surface of the left back side shutter base 1634. The left back shutter base 1634 is a base that protrudes downward from the mounting flange portion 1634a to the left back slide base 1631 (the left part of the left back slide base 1631 in this embodiment). It is configured to be attached to the left back side slide base 1631 by screwing to the mounting portion 1631a.
In this embodiment, the engagement receiving member 1637 is mounted on the mounting flange portion 1634a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mounting position of the engagement receiving member 1637 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

Further, the left back shutter base 1634 is formed of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light, and the front surface of the left back shutter base 1634 is decorated by uneven processing or the like.
The LED substrate 1635 disposed on the rear surface side of the left back shutter base 1634 includes LEDs on the LED substrate 1635 (specifically, on the front surface of the LED substrate 1635), and the left back side. The shutter base 1634 can be irradiated with light from the rear side.
Further, a driven contact receiving portion (piece) 1634b protruding toward the front side is provided on the right portion of the left back shutter base 1634 (in the case of the present embodiment, on the right end of the left back shutter base 1634). Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the left back side back box member 1636 has a concave chamber shape whose front surface is open, and guide guides projecting downward from the lower surface front end of the left back side back box member 1636. A piece 1636a is provided. This guide receiving piece 1636a is inserted into the guide groove 1320a of the left rear shutter guide 1320L of the decorative guide unit 1300 of the lower movable unit 1200 via the guide receiving opening 1300b. As a result, the left and right shutter unit 1630 can be slid in the left-right direction by the lower movable unit 1200.

The left back shutter unit 1630 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the left shutter drive unit 1610 by a left back bearing unit 1633.
Specifically, the left back side slider 1632 is configured to be screwed to the left back side slide base 1631, and both the rear end portion on the upper surface and the rear end portion on the lower surface of the left back side slider 1632. Is provided with a ball support groove that can be engaged with the ball of the left back side bearing unit 1633 along the longitudinal direction of the left back side slider 1632 (that is, the left-right direction). The left back bearing unit 1633 is mounted on the left back slider 1632 such that each ball of the left back bearing unit 1633 engages with the upper and lower ball support grooves of the left back slider 1632. Specifically, it is attached to the left back slider 1632 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.
On the other hand, a ball support groove that can engage with the ball of the left back bearing unit 1633 is formed on both the upper and lower portions of the inner surface of the left back slide rail 1621 (see FIG. 62) of the left shutter drive unit 1610. The left rear slide rail 1621 is provided along the longitudinal direction (that is, the left-right direction). The left back bearing unit 1633 is attached to the left back slide rail 1621 so that the balls of the left back bearing unit 1633 engage with the upper and lower ball support grooves of the left back slide rail 1621. Specifically, the left rear slide rail 1621 can be slidably mounted in the left-right direction.
Therefore, when the left back side bearing unit 1633 is mounted on both the left back side slider 1632 and the left back side slide rail 1621 via the ball, the left back side shutter unit 1630 is connected to the left shutter drive unit 1610. Thus, it is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.

FIG. 64 shows the detailed structure of the left front shutter unit 1650. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the left front shutter unit 1650 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 64, the left front shutter unit 1650 is mainly composed of a left front slide base 1651 elongated in the left-right direction and a left front side elongated in the left-right direction attached to the rear surface side of the left front slide base 1651. A slider 1652, a left front bearing unit 1653 mounted on the left front slider 1652 from the rear, a left front shutter base 1654 elongated vertically in a left front slide base 1651, and a left front shutter base 1654. LED substrates 1655 and 1655 disposed on the rear surface side, a left front back box member 1656 mounted on the left front shutter base 1654 from behind the LED substrates 1655 and 1655 and supporting the LED substrates 1655 and 1655, and a left front back Box member 1656 (in the case of the present embodiment, on the left front side back box member 1656 On the right side) and an engagement member 1657 that can be engaged with the engagement receiving member 1637 (see FIG. 63) of the left back shutter unit 1630 from the rear, and a front surface provided at the right end of the left front back box member 1656 A permanent magnet 1658 housed from the front in the magnet housing portion 1656a having an open concave chamber, a magnet pressing member 1659 attached to the left front back box member 1656 from the front of the permanent magnet 1658, and a left front shutter base 1654 (book) In the case of the embodiment, the effect movable member 1661 attached from the front to the lower front center of the left front shutter base 1654 and the rear surface side of the left front shutter base 1654 (in the case of this embodiment, the rear surface side). And an urging member (spring) 1662 mounted on the lower side of the center in the vertical direction.

The left front shutter base 1654 has a concave chamber shape with an open rear surface, and includes a mounting flange portion 1654a that protrudes upward from the front end portion of the upper surface of the left front shutter base 1654. The left front shutter base 1654 has a base mounting portion 1651a that protrudes downward from the mounting flange portion 1654a to the left front slide base 1651 (in this embodiment, the left portion of the left front slide base 1651). It is configured to be attached to the left front slide base 1651 by being screwed to the left side.
Further, the left front shutter base 1654 includes a guide receiving piece 1654b that protrudes downward from the front end portion of the lower surface of the left front shutter base 1654. This guide receiving piece 1654b is inserted into the guide groove 1350a of the front shutter guide 1350 included in the decorative guide unit 1300 of the lower movable unit 1200. As a result, the left movable shutter unit 1650 can be assisted by the lower movable unit 1200 to slide in the left-right direction.

The left front shutter base 1654 is made of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light, and the front surface of the left front shutter base 1654 is decorated by uneven processing or the like.
The LED board 1655 disposed on the rear surface side of the left front shutter base 1654 includes LEDs on the LED board 1655 (specifically, on the front surface of the LED board 1655). 1654 can be irradiated with light from the rear side.

The left front shutter unit 1650 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the left shutter drive unit 1610 by a left front bearing unit 1653.
Specifically, the left front slider 1652 is configured to be screwed to the left front slide base 1651, and both the rear end portion of the upper surface and the rear end portion of the lower surface of the left front slider 1652 include A ball support groove that can be engaged with the ball of the left front bearing unit 1653 is provided along the longitudinal direction (that is, the left-right direction) of the left front slider 1652. The left front bearing unit 1653 is mounted on the left front slider 1652 such that each ball of the left front bearing unit 1653 engages with the upper and lower ball support grooves of the left front slider 1652. Specifically, The left front slider 1652 is slidably mounted in the left-right direction.
On the other hand, a ball support groove that can be engaged with a ball of the left front bearing unit 1653 is formed on both the upper and lower portions of the inner surface of the left front slide rail 1622 (see FIG. 62) of the left shutter drive unit 1610. The side slide rail 1622 is provided along the longitudinal direction (that is, the left-right direction). The left front bearing unit 1653 is mounted on the left front slide rail 1622 such that each ball of the left front bearing unit 1653 and the upper and lower ball support grooves of the left front slide rail 1622 are engaged. Can be mounted on the left front slide rail 1622 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.
Accordingly, the left front side bearing unit 1653 is mounted on both the left front side slider 1652 and the left front side slide rail 1622 via the ball, so that the left front side shutter unit 1650 slides in the horizontal direction with respect to the left side shutter drive unit 1610. It will be mounted movably.

Here, in the left shutter drive unit 1610, the left front movable base 1612 to which the left front shutter unit 1650 is mounted is mounted with the drive source 1613, while the left back shutter unit 1630 is mounted to the left back movable. A drive source is not attached to the base 1611. The left front slide base 1651 included in the left front shutter unit 1650 is provided with a rack portion 1651b that meshes with a second driven gear 1617 that rotates in conjunction with the drive shaft of the drive source 1613, while the left back shutter. The unit 1630 is not provided with a rack portion.
That is, the left front shutter unit 1650 is configured to be slidable independently, whereas the left back shutter unit 1630 is not configured to be slidable independently.

FIG. 65 shows a detailed structure of the left front back box member 1656. FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the left front side back box member 1656 as viewed from the front side. Here, in FIG. 65, LED boards 1655 and 1655 and permanent magnets 1658 are disposed in the left front back box member 1656.
As shown in FIG. 65, the left front side back box member 1656 has a concave chamber shape whose front surface is open, and the right side surface of the left front side back box member 1656 is on the right front side when the shutter unit 150 is in a shielding state. The contact surface 1656b is in contact with the left side surface (contact surface) of the right front back box member 1756 of the shutter unit 1750.
Further, on the right side surface of the left front side back box member 1656 (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper side of the right side surface), a specific portion of the display region R in the shielding state of the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) (in the case of the present embodiment, A notch is provided as a visual window forming portion 1656c for forming a visual window portion W that exposes the upper central portion of the display region R so as to be visible, and the left portion of the left front back box member 1656 (in this embodiment). In this case, on the upper left side of the left front side back box member 1656, there are main driving contact portions (pieces) 1656 d that can contact the driven contact receiving portion 1634 b (see FIG. 63) of the left back shutter unit 1630. It protrudes in an L shape toward the side.

FIG. 66 shows the detailed structure of the left front shutter base 1654 to which the effect movable member 1661 and the urging member 1662 are attached. 66A is a perspective view of the left front shutter base 1654 with the effect movable member 1661 and the urging member 1662 attached, as viewed from the rear side, and FIG. 66B is a view in FIG. FIG. 10 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of a biasing member 1662.
As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the left front shutter base 1654 has a concave chamber shape with an open rear surface, and is formed on the right side of the left front shutter base 1654 (in the case of this embodiment, on the right side upper side). Is a visual recognition for forming a visual recognition window portion W that exposes a specific portion of the display region R (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper central portion of the display region R) in a shielded state of the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member). As the window forming portion 1654c, a notch corresponding to the visual window forming portion 1656c (see FIG. 65) of the left front back box member 1656 is provided.

The effect movable member 1661 attached to the left front shutter base 1654 is rotatable with respect to the left front shutter base 1654.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 66 (a) and 66 (b), a rotation shaft pin 1661a is provided on the lower end side of the effect movable member 1661 so as to protrude rearward. On the other hand, a shaft hole 1654d through which the rotation shaft pin 1661a can be inserted in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the rotation shaft pin 1661a in the left front shutter base 1654. That is, the effect movable member 1661 is configured to be pivotally supported (attached) to the left front shutter base 1654 by inserting the rotation shaft pin 1661a into the shaft hole 1654d of the left front shutter base 1654 from the front. Thereby, the effect movable member 1661 is rotatable with respect to the left front shutter base 1654.

In this embodiment, in order to prevent friction or wear between the shaft hole 1654d of the left front shutter base 1654 and the rotation shaft pin 1661a of the effect movable member 1661, a bush (lubricating member) is provided on the rotation shaft pin 1661a. 1650a is configured to be mounted, and in order to prevent the effect movable member 1661 from being detached from the left front shutter base 1654 and the bushing 1650a from being removed from the rotation shaft pin 1661a, A stopper 1650c is attached to the tip of the dynamic shaft pin 1661a.
As shown in FIG. 65, the left front back box member 1656 has a bearing 1656e having a recess into which the rotation shaft pin 1661a and a bush 1650a attached to the rotation shaft pin 1661a can be inserted from the front. It is projecting toward.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 66 (a) and 66 (b), the guide pin 1661b is located on the rear side of the effect movable member 1661 at a position above the projecting position of the rotation shaft pin 1661a. Projected toward. On the other hand, at the position corresponding to the guide pin 1661b in the left front shutter base 1654, a guide hole 1654e that can be slidably engaged with the guide pin 1661b (specifically, the guide pin 1661b can be inserted) A long long hole is provided along the track of the guide pin 1661b accompanying the rotation of the movable member 1661. That is, the guide pin 1661b and the guide hole 1654e are configured to assist the rotation operation of the effect movable member 1661 relative to the left front shutter base 1654 when the guide pin 1661b slides along the guide hole 1654e.

The urging member 1662 attached to the left front shutter base 1654 is a direction in which the effect movable member 1661 opens the effect movable member 1661 attached to the left front shutter base 1654, that is, the upper end side of the effect movable member 1661 is outside. It is a spring that biases in the direction of falling (left side).
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the urging member 1662 is fixed to a spring hooking portion 1654f having one end projecting rearward from the inner surface of the left front shutter base 1654. The other end is fixed to the guide pin 1661b of the effect movable member 1661 projecting to the rear surface side of the left front shutter base 1654 via the guide hole 1654e of the left front shutter base 1654 on the rear surface side. .
Accordingly, when the effect movable member 1661 is opened by the urging force of the urging member 1662 and a force against the urging force is applied, the effect movable member 1661 rotates clockwise with respect to the left front shutter base 1654. When it is moved to the closed state and the force against the urging force is released, it is turned counterclockwise with respect to the left front shutter base 1654 and opened.

In this embodiment, a bush (lubricating member) 1650b is attached to the guide pin 1661b in order to prevent friction and wear between the other end of the biasing member 1662 and the guide pin 1661b of the effect movable member 1661. The effect movable member 1661 is detached from the left front shutter base 1654, the biasing member 1662 is detached from the effect movable member 1661, and the bush 1650b is detached from the guide pin 1661b. In order to prevent this, the stopper metal 1650d is attached to the tip of the guide pin 1661b.
As shown in FIG. 65, the left front back box member 1656 has a guide pin 1661b, a bush 1650b attached to the guide pin 1661b, and the like as a guide hole 1656f through which the effect movable member 1661 can rotate. A long long hole is provided along the track of the guide pin 1661b accompanying the movement.

Next, how the left back shutter unit 1630 and the left front shutter unit 1650 move will be described with reference to FIGS.
67 is an exploded perspective view of the left shutter unit 1600 viewed from the front side when the left back shutter unit 1630 and the left front shutter unit 1650 are in the initial positions, and FIG. 68 is a left front shutter unit 1650. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a relationship between a left shutter driving unit 1610 and a left front shutter unit 1650 when is at an initial position.
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the left back shutter unit 1630 and the left front shutter unit 1650 when moving from the initial position to the shielding position, and FIG. 70 illustrates the relationship from the shielding position to the initial position. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the left back shutter unit 1630 and the left front shutter unit 1650 when moving to the left.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the left shutter unit 1600, the left back shutter unit 1630 is mounted on the left back movable base 1611 of the left shutter drive unit 1610 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and the left front side. The shutter unit 1650 is attached to the left front movable base 1612 of the left shutter drive unit 1610 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.
As shown in FIG. 68, when the left front shutter unit 1650 is in an initial position (specifically, a position that does not block any part of the display area R of the display device 41), The second driven gear (drive gear) 1617 meshes with the right end side of the rack portion 1651b of the left front shutter unit 1650. At this time, a light shielding plate 1651c provided at the left end portion of the left front slide base 1651 of the left front shutter unit 1650 is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 1625 provided in the left shutter driving portion 1610. The position detection sensor 1625 detects the position. That is, the left shutter unit 1600 is configured to detect whether or not the left front shutter unit 1650 is in the initial position by the position detection sensor 1625.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 69A, the left back shutter unit 1630 and the left front shutter unit 1650 are at the initial positions (specifically, positions where no part of the display region R of the display device 41 is blocked). In some cases, the left back shutter unit 1630 and the left front shutter unit 1650 overlap in the front-rear direction, and the engagement receiving member 1637 included in the left back shutter unit 1630 and the engagement member 1657 included in the left front shutter unit 1650. Are engaged (in the case of this embodiment, the tip of the engaging member 1657 is inserted into the engaging receiving member 1637).

When the drive shaft of the drive source 1613 of the left shutter drive unit 1610 rotates and the second driven gear 1617 rotates (in the present embodiment, it rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side), FIG. As shown in (a) and (b), only the left front shutter unit 1650 having the rack portion 1651b meshing with the second driven gear 1617 moves in the right direction with respect to the left shutter drive portion 1610, and is engaged. The engagement between the receiving member 1637 and the engaging member 1657 is released.
Thereafter, when the left front shutter unit 1650 moves further to the right, the main contact portion 1656d of the left front shutter unit 1650 becomes a driven contact receiving portion 1634b of the left back shutter unit 1630, as shown in FIG. 69 (c). Abut. In this state, when the left front shutter unit 1650 moves further to the right, the left back shutter unit 1630 is pulled by the left front shutter unit 1650 and moves to the right with respect to the left shutter drive unit 1610. . As a result, when the left front shutter unit 1650 reaches the shielding position (specifically, the position where the right part of the one side (left side) of the display region R is shielded), the left back shutter unit 1630 is also in the shielding position ( Specifically, the position reaches the left side of the display area R (the left side).

When the left back shutter unit 1630 and the left front shutter unit 1650 are in the shielding position, when the second driven gear 1617 is reversed (in the case of the present embodiment, rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side), FIG. As shown in a) and (b), only the left front shutter unit 1650 having the rack portion 1651b meshing with the second driven gear 1617 moves to the left with respect to the left shutter drive portion 1610, and the main drive The contact between the contact portion 1656d and the driven contact receiving portion 1634b is released.
Thereafter, when the left front shutter unit 1650 further moves leftward, the engaging member 1657 of the left front shutter unit 1650 is engaged with the engagement receiving member 1637 of the left back shutter unit 1630 as shown in FIG. Match. In this state, when the left front shutter unit 1650 further moves leftward, the left back shutter unit 1630 is pulled by the left front shutter unit 1650 and moves leftward with respect to the left shutter drive unit 1610. . Thereby, the left front shutter unit 1650 and the left back shutter unit 1630 reach the initial positions.

Note that the configurations of the engagement member 1657 and the engagement receiving member 1637 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
Specifically, the engagement receiving member 1637 is not a cylindrical member as in the present embodiment, but, for example, by engaging (contacting) with the engagement member 1657, the left front shutter unit 1650 is moved to the right. It may be a biasing member such as a coil spring that biases. In this case, the initial torque when the left front shutter unit 1650 is moved rightward from the initial position can be reduced.
Further, the engagement receiving member 1637 is, for example, a piece-like protrusion protruding toward the front side at the right end of the left back shutter unit 1630 (specifically, the left back shutter base 1634). May be. Further, the engaging member 1657 is also a piece-like protrusion protruding toward the rear side, for example, at the right end of the left front shutter unit 1650 (specifically, the left front back box member 1656 or the like). Also good. In this case, the engagement receiving member 1637 and the engagement member 1657 are engaged in a state where the left back shutter unit 1630 and the left front shutter unit 1650 overlap in the front-rear direction (as shown in FIG. 70C). If possible, both the engagement receiving member 1637 and the engagement member 1657 may be a piece-like protrusion, or one of them is a piece-like protrusion, and the other is the same shape (engagement) as this embodiment. The receiving member 1637 may have a cylindrical shape, and the engaging member 1657 may have a rod shape.

Further, the driven contact receiving portion 1634b can be configured to be able to contact not only the main drive contact portion 1656d but also the engagement member 1657. In this case, the driven contact receiving portion 1634b can be used as an alternative to the engagement receiving member 1637.
Further, when the engagement receiving member 1637 is a piece-like protrusion, for example, a state where the left back shutter unit 1630 and the left front shutter unit 1650 overlap in the front-rear direction (a state shown in FIG. 70C). The one-side projection (that is, the engaging member 1657) is placed on the left back side shutter unit 1630 (specifically, the left back side shutter base 1634, etc.) so as to be able to come into contact with the main moving contact portion 1656d in FIG. It is also possible to constitute so as to project from the left end portion toward the front side. In this case, the main contact portion 1656d can be used as an alternative to the engaging member 1657.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 76, how the shutters (the left back shutter unit 1630, the left front shutter unit 1650, the right back shutter unit 1730, and the right front shutter unit 1750) move will be described.
71 is a perspective view of the rendering mechanism unit 1000 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 72 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the left shutter unit 1600 in FIG.
FIG. 73 is a front view of the rendering mechanism unit 1000 when the main contact portions 1656d and 1756d and the driven contact receiving portions 1634b and 1734b are in contact with each other. 74 is a front view of the rendering mechanism unit 1000 when the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielded state, and FIG. 75 is a perspective view of the rendering mechanism unit 1000 when the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielded state. It is a perspective view. FIG. 76 is a view for explaining the relationship between the rendering mechanism unit 1000 and the center case unit 40 when the shutter unit 1500 is in the shielding state. In FIG. 71 to FIG. 74, the winning ball descending member 1900 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the effect movable unit 1400, the movable portion 1410 is slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the drive portion 1420.
In the movable portion 1410, the effect movable member 1414 is rotatable with respect to the movable base 1411.

71 and 72, the guide receiving piece 1654b included in the left front shutter unit 1650 of the left shutter unit 1600 and the guide receiving piece 1754b included in the right front shutter unit 1750 of the right shutter unit 1700 are the lower part. The decorative guide unit 1300 of the movable unit 1200 is inserted into the guide groove 1350a of the near-side shutter guide 1350.
Further, a guide receiving piece 1636a (see FIG. 61) included in the left back shutter unit 1630 of the left shutter unit 1600 is inserted into the guide groove 1320a of the left back shutter guide 1320L included in the decorative guide unit 1300 via the guide receiving opening 1300b. A guide receiving piece 1736a (see FIG. 61) of the right back shutter unit 1730 of the right shutter unit 1700 that is inserted is inserted into the guide receiving opening 1320a of the right back shutter guide 1320R of the decoration guide unit 1300. It is inserted through 1300b.

Further, the effect movable member 1661 of the left front shutter unit 1650 is opened by the urging member 1662 (see FIG. 64) (that is, a state in which the upper end side of the effect movable member 1661 is tilted outward (left side)). 71 and 72, when the left front shutter unit 1650 is in the initial position, the operation guide member 1100b provided in the control base 1100 faces the inner side (right side). A force against the urging force of the urging member 1662 is acting on the effect movable member 1661. Therefore, when the left front shutter unit 1650 is in the initial position, the effect movable member 1661 is not in an open state but in a closed state (that is, in a vertically oriented state).
Further, the engagement member 1657 of the left front shutter unit 1650 and the engagement receiving member 1637 of the left back shutter unit 1630 are engaged.

Similarly, in the right front shutter unit 1750, the effect movable member 1761 of the right front shutter unit 1750 is opened by an urging member (the urging member (not shown) attached to the guide pin of the effect movable member 1761) (that is, not shown). When the upper right side shutter unit 1750 is in the initial position as shown in FIG. 71, the upper end side of the effect movable member 1761 is biased to the outside (right side). A force against the urging force of the urging member is applied to the effect movable member 1761 by being pressed toward the inner side (left side) by the operation guide member 1100 c provided on the control base 1100. Therefore, when the right front shutter unit 1750 is in the initial position, the effect movable member 1761 is not in an open state but in a closed state (that is, in a vertically oriented state).
Further, the engagement receiving member 1757 (see FIG. 61) of the right front shutter unit 1750 and the engagement member 1737 (see FIG. 61) of the right back shutter unit 1730 are engaged.

  In the present embodiment, in the left shutter unit 1600, the left rear shutter unit 1630 is provided with a cylindrical engagement receiving member 1637, and the left front shutter unit 1650 is provided with a rod-like engagement member 1657. On the other hand, in the right shutter unit 1700, a rod-like engagement member 1737 is provided in the right rear shutter unit 1730, and a cylindrical engagement receiving member 1757 is provided in the right front shutter unit 1750. It is not limited. For example, an engagement member may be provided in the left back shutter unit 1630, and an engagement receiving member may be provided in the left front shutter unit 1650. Further, for example, an engagement receiving member may be provided in the right back shutter unit 1730 and an engagement member may be provided in the right front shutter unit 1750.

Thereafter, in the left shutter unit 1600, when the drive shaft of the drive source 1613 of the left shutter drive unit 1610 rotates, only the left front shutter unit 1650 having the rack unit 1651b moves to the right with respect to the left shutter drive unit 1610. To do. At this time, the effect movable member 1661 of the left front shutter unit 1650 presses the operation guide member 1100b of the control base 1100 by the urging force of the urging member 1662, so that the left front shutter unit 1650 is moved rightward from the initial position. It is possible to reduce the initial torque when moving to.
As the left front shutter unit 1650 moves in the right direction, the engagement between the engagement member 1657 of the left front shutter unit 1650 and the engagement receiving member 1637 of the left back shutter unit 1630 is released.
Further, as the left front shutter unit 1650 moves in the right direction, the force that the operation guide member 1100b of the control base 1100 presses the effect movable member 1661 (that is, the force that resists the urging force of the urging member 1662) gradually. And the effect movable member 1661 gradually rotates counterclockwise as shown in FIG.

Similarly, in the right shutter unit 1700, when the drive shaft of the drive source 1713 (see FIG. 61) of the right shutter drive unit 1710 is rotated, only the right front shutter unit 1750 having the rack portion 1751b (see FIG. 61) is the right shutter. The drive unit 1710 moves to the left. At this time, the effect movable member 1761 of the right front shutter unit 1750 is the operation guide member of the control base 1100 by the urging force of the urging member (the urging member (not shown) attached to the guide pin of the effect movable member 1761). Since 1100c is pressed, it is possible to reduce the initial torque when moving the right front shutter unit 1750 from the initial position to the left. Here, it is assumed that the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive source 1613 of the left shutter drive unit 1610 and the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive source 1713 of the right shutter drive unit 1710 are synchronized.
As the right front shutter unit 1750 moves in the left direction, the engagement between the engagement receiving member 1757 of the right front shutter unit 1750 and the engagement member 1737 of the right back shutter unit 1730 is released.
Further, as the right front shutter unit 1750 moves in the left direction, the force with which the operation guide member 1100c of the control base 1100 presses the effect movable member 1761 (that is, the urging member attached to the guide pin of the effect movable member 1761). The force against the urging force is gradually released, and the effect movable member 1761 is gradually rotated clockwise as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, when the left front shutter unit 1650 further moves to the right, the main contact portion 1656d of the left front shutter unit 1650 contacts the driven contact receiving portion 1634b of the left back shutter unit 1630, as shown in FIG. In this state, when the left front shutter unit 1650 moves further to the right, the left back shutter unit 1630 is pulled by the left front shutter unit 1650 and moves to the right with respect to the left shutter drive unit 1610. .
Similarly, when the right front shutter unit 1750 moves further leftward, as shown in FIG. 73, the main contact portion 1756d of the right front shutter unit 1750 contacts the driven contact receiving portion 1734b of the right back shutter unit 1730. . In this state, when the right front shutter unit 1750 further moves leftward, the right back shutter unit 1730 is pulled by the right front shutter unit 1750 and moves leftward with respect to the right shutter driving unit 1710. .

  In FIG. 73, the movable unit 1410 of the effect movable unit 1400 moves upward and is positioned in front of the display region R (display surface) before the shutter unit 1500 enters the shielding state. After the shutter unit 1500 is in the shielding state, the movable portion 1410 is moved upward to be positioned in front of the display area R (display surface), and is positioned in front of the display area R when the shutter unit 1500 is opened. The effect movable member 1414 of the movable portion 1410 can be configured to rotate in the state in which it has been performed.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielded state, that is, each shutter (left back shutter unit 1630, left front shutter unit 1650, right back shutter unit 1730, right front shutter unit 1750) is opened. When the shield position is reached, the viewing window forming part of the left front shutter unit 1650 (the viewing window forming part 1654c of the left front shutter base 1654 and the viewing window forming part 1656c of the left front back box member 1656) and the right front shutter unit 1750 The visual window portion W is formed by the visual window forming portion (the visual window forming portion 1754c of the right front shutter base 1754 and the visual window forming portion of the right front back box member 1756). That is, the visual recognition window W is formed so as to straddle the left shutter unit 1600 (first shielding member) and the right shutter unit 1700 (second shielding member).
At this time, the permanent magnet 1658 attached to the left front shutter unit 1650 and the permanent magnet 1758 attached to the right front shutter unit 1750 attract each other, and the left front shutter unit 1650 and the right front shutter unit 1750 fit together. It comes to contact with.

  In this embodiment, since the shutter unit 1500 has a two-stage front and rear configuration, as shown in FIG. 75, when the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielded state, it is located behind the left front shutter unit 1650 and the right front shutter unit 1750. Thus, a space (effect space Q) is formed between the left back side shutter unit 1630 and the right back side shutter unit 1730. Therefore, even when the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielded state or when the shutter unit 1500 is in an open / close operation, the operation of the effect movable unit 1400 (that is, the moving movement of the movable portion 1410 in the vertical direction, The rotating operation of the movable member 1414 is not hindered.

In the present embodiment, the shutter on the left side (the left back shutter unit 1630, the left front shutter unit 1650) is formed between the control base 1100 and the center case unit 40 when in the initial position. It is configured to be stored in T1 (see FIG. 76 (b)). That is, when the left shutter is in the initial position, it is located behind the winning ball passage member 470 and the warp device 442 of the center case unit 40 and is difficult to see when viewed from the front (FIG. 2). reference).
On the other hand, when the right shutter (the right back shutter unit 1730 and the right front shutter unit 1750) is in the initial position, the shutter storage unit T2 (see FIG. 76) formed between the control base 1100 and the side effect unit 700. (See (a)). That is, when the right shutter unit is in the initial position, it is located behind the unit base member 710 of the side effect unit 700 and is difficult to see when viewed from the front (see FIG. 2).

Here, when the left shutter is in the initial position, the winning ball passage member 470 and the warp device 442 positioned in front of the left front shutter unit 1650 and when the right shutter is in the initial position, the right front shutter unit 1750 The unit base member 710 located in front is formed of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, when each shutter is in the initial position, the winning ball passage member 470 and the warp device 442 can be illuminated by the light from the left front shutter unit 1650, and the light from the right front shutter unit 1750 can be The movable decorative member 750 can be illuminated through the base member 710.
That is, the shutter storage portions T1 and T2 form a storage portion for storing the shutter unit 1500 so as to cover the front surface of the released shutter unit 1500 (shielding member). The shutter storage portions T1 and T2 are provided with a decorative portion (a winning ball passage member 470, a warp device 442, a movable decorative member 750, etc.) on the front surface, and transmit light irradiated from the rear toward the decorative portion. The decorative portion is configured such that an effect light emitting portion (LED provided on the left front shutter unit 1650 or the right front shutter unit 1750) that has passed through the shutter storage portions T1 and T2 when the shutter unit 1500 is in the released state. It is configured to be illuminated by light.

  77 to 79 show the detailed structure of the first special variable winning device 38. FIG. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the first special variable winning device 38 as seen from the front side. FIG. 78A is a perspective view of the first special variable winning device 38 viewed from the front side when the open / close door 38c is closed, and FIG. 78B is an open state of the open / close door 38c. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st special variation winning device 38 in the case of being from the front side. 78A and 78B, the base member 380, the front decoration member 381, the left substrate storage member 382, the right substrate storage member 383, the ball introduction member 384, and the mechanism base member 385 are not shown. ing. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view of the first special variable winning device 38 as seen from the right side.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the first special variation winning device 38 mainly includes a base member 380 that is long in the left-right direction and has an opening at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction, and the opening of the base member 380 from the front. An open / close door 38c that can be opened and closed in the opening so as to cover it, a front decorative member 381 that is mounted on the front surface of the base member 380, and a left substrate storage member 382 that is mounted on the left rear portion of the base member 380. A right board storage member 383 attached to the right rear portion of the base member 380, and a ball introduction member 384 attached to the substantially central portion of the rear surface of the base member 380 so as to cover the opening of the base member 380 from the rear. A count switch 38a, 38a for detecting a game ball which is disposed in the ball introducing member 384 and wins the first special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38; A mechanism base member 385 mounted on the surface, a substrate base member 386 mounted on the rear surface of the mechanism base member 385, a big prize opening solenoid 38b attached to the mechanism base member 385 from the rear, and a big prize opening solenoid 38b; A movable arm member 387 for connecting the opening / closing door 38c is provided.

As shown in FIG. 77, a general winning opening 35 (a general winning opening 35 on the lower right side of the center case unit 40) is provided on the right portion of the front decorative member 381. Then, among the base member 380 and the right board storage member 383, the game ball won in the general winning opening 35 is placed at the position behind the general winning opening 35 provided in the front decoration member 381 to the winning opening switch 35 a. The winning ball guiding path 35d is provided. The winning ball guiding path 35d is provided from the front side to the rear side of the game board 30 main body. That is, a winning ball guiding path 35d having a depth (length in the front-rear direction) reaching the rear surface of the main body of the game board 30 is formed by the thickness of the base member 380 and the front decoration member 381.
In addition, the ball introduction member 384 is provided with a start winning ball flow path 37d through which a game ball won by the normal variation winning device 37 disposed above the first special variable winning device 38 passes.

An LED substrate 386 a for irradiating light from behind the mechanism base member 385 is attached to the substantially central portion of the front surface of the substrate base member 386.
The LED 386a1 is provided on the LED board 386a (specifically, on the front surface of the LED board 386a), and the first special variable winning device 38 is irradiated from the LED 386a1 of the LED board 386a and can transmit light. Light that has passed through the mechanism base member 385 and the ball introduction member 384 formed of a light-transmitting material can be used to shine the open door 38c formed of the light-receiving material or the light-transmitting material. .

In addition, an LED substrate 382a for irradiating light from behind the base member 380 is accommodated in the left substrate accommodating member 382 having a concave shape in the front opening.
LEDs are provided on the LED board 382a (specifically, on the front surface of the LED board 382a), and the first special variable winning device 38 is irradiated from the LEDs of the LED board 382a and does not transmit light. The lens part 381a of the front decoration member 381 can be made to shine by the light that has passed through the opening 380a provided in the base member 380 that is configured to be difficult to transmit light.

In addition, an LED substrate 383a for irradiating light from behind the base member 380 is accommodated in the right substrate accommodating member 383 having a concave shape in the front opening.
The LED is provided on the LED substrate 383a (specifically, on the front surface of the LED substrate 383a), and the first special variable winning device 38 is irradiated from the LED of the LED substrate 383a and does not transmit light. The lens part 381a of the front decoration member 381 can be made to shine by the light that has passed through the opening 380a provided in the base member 380 that is configured to be difficult to transmit light.

  That is, the LED 386a1 included in the LED substrate 386a, the LED included in the LED substrate 382a, and the LED included in the LED substrate 383a emit light from the first special variable winning device 38 (variable winning device (specifically, first variable winning device)). The light emitting means (specifically, the first light emitting means) that can be made to be used.

  In addition, a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud is attached to the substrate base member 386. The mechanism base member 385 is provided with a through-hole 385a through which the magnetic sensor switch 61 can be inserted. Sphere introduction member 384) or in the vicinity of the big prize opening. Thus, it is possible to detect fraud such as guiding the game ball to the first special variation winning device 38 or the normal variation winning device 37 using a magnet.

  In addition, a link member 38d for connecting the movable arm member 387 and the special prize opening solenoid 38b is attached to the distal end portion of the plunger of the special prize opening solenoid 38b. It is pivotally supported on the mechanism base member 385 by 387a. The mechanism base member 385 penetrates in the front-rear direction as an engagement space 385b for engagement between the engagement pin 387b provided on the shaft support end side of the movable arm member 387 and the link member 38d. A through space is provided, and the movable arm member 387 is engaged with the engagement pin 387b of the movable arm member 387 and the link member 38d in the engagement space 385b, so that the movable arm member 387 is connected to the big prize opening through the link member 38d. It is connected to the plunger of the solenoid 38b.

The open / close door 38c is pivotally supported by the base member 380 by pivot shafts 38c1 and 38c1. A through space penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided as an engagement space 384a for engagement with an engagement receiving portion 38c2 provided on the shaft support end portion side of the opening / closing door 38c.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), when the plunger of the big prize opening solenoid 38b is drawn (the tip of the plunger moves backward), the link member 38d is used to The movable arm member 387 connected to the plunger rotates to move the engaging portion 387c of the movable arm member 387 upward, and the engagement receiving portion 38c2 engaged with the engaging portion 387c moves upward. Pushed up. As a result, the open / close door 38c having the engagement receiving portion 38c2 is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and is opened.

FIG. 80 is a block diagram of a control system of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and a signal from the interface chip (I / F) 121 connected to the proximity switch in the input unit 120 (start winning detection signal). Is provided with an inverter 112 such as an inverter that logically inverts the signal and input to the gaming microcomputer 111 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the internal RAM of gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch to inform gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the initialization switch is turned on, and forcibly initializes information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. . Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed, and an individual IC register 111D.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state.
The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a second half variation pattern table and a first half variation pattern table.

  Reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can change, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state. This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (reliability is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), special 4 reach (SP4 reach, premier reach), etc. are set.
The reliability increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <special 4 reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed.
Although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 is a jackpot determining random number for the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various reach and reach). A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation display game in a variation display with no change), a random number for determining a hit of a normal variation display game, and the like from the oscillation circuit 113 Based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal), a clock generator is provided that generates a timer interrupt signal for a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111A selects one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) or a special figure routine process (step A9) in a special figure game process to be described later. One fluctuation pattern table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. To do.
In addition, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs the ID stored in the individual ID register 111D from the information transmission unit 71 when an event such as a power-on or a big hit occurs or when an illegality is detected by a magnet or a radio wave.

  Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. , Control for paying out a prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 outputs a launch permission signal that permits the launch of the game ball to the launch control device 201 that controls the launch device on the condition that it is electrically connected to the card unit.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a start port 1 switch 36a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, and a general winning port. The switch 35a and the count switch 38a are connected via the proximity I / F 121. When the connected switch is a proximity switch, the proximity I / F 121 receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. It is an interface chip that converts to Proximity I / F 121 seems to be floating because the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the proximity switch is improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. An abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  All the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are supplied to the second input port 122 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140, and also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. It is like that. In addition, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 122. It is configured. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 is assumed to receive a signal from a microswitch or the like, and is detected as a negative logic, that is, a low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when a micro switch is used as the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a start winning opening 36 converted by signals from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the proximity I / F 121. The start port 1 switch 36 a in the inside, the start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34 a, the general winning port switch 35 a, and the count switch 38 a, and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. A second input port 122 is provided to supply the input. The data held by the second input port 122 is read by asserting the enable signal CE1 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 122. be able to. The same applies to other ports described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 receives signals and payouts from the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are fetched and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. One input port 123 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 124 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. The circuit 124 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 400, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once inputted to the first input port 123 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 124 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs a 4-bit data signal output to the payout control device 200, a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data, and a data strobe signal SSTB output to the effect control device 300. 1 and a second output port 132 for generating an 8-bit data signal to be output to the effect control device 300. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 by parallel communication. In addition, the data strobe signal from the first output port 131 is provided to the output unit 130 so that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side, that is, to ensure one-way communication. A unidirectional buffer 133 that outputs an 8-bit data signal from the SSTB and the second output port 132 is provided. A buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first output port 131 to the payout control device 200.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 134 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 134 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 134.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 134 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 134 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a first special variable prize winning device 38 (a large prize opening solenoid) 38b and a solenoid (normal electric solenoid) to open a movable member 37b of the normal variable winning prize device 37. ) According to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, the third output port 135 for outputting the open / close data of 37c and the on / off data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected, for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the information transmission unit (external information terminal board) 71 The fifth output port 137 is provided. Information relating to the gaming machine 10 output from the information transmission unit (external information terminal board) 71 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (not shown) installed in a game store.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the big prize opening solenoid 38b output from the third output port 135, and receives the solenoid driving signal and the opening / closing data signal of the power solenoid 37c to generate the solenoid driving signal. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a for outputting, a second driver 138b for outputting an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 outputted from the third output port 135, and a fourth output port 136 The third driver 138c that outputs the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third display device 50, and the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the unit (external information terminal board) 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the third driver 138c that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the second driver 138b for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs 12 V, and drawing the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the information transmission unit (external information terminal board) 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 134, the third output port 135, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 1. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection apparatus 1 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore, ports such as the input ports 122 and 123 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 formed of an amusement chip (IC), as with the game microcomputer 111, and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU 311. , VDP (Video Display Processor) 313 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the 2nd CPU 312, and various melody and sound effects such as speakers (audio output unit) A sound source LSI 314 is provided to control the output of sound for reproduction from 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are connected to program ROMs 321 and 322 each composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by each CPU. Is connected to an image ROM 323 storing character images and video data, and an audio ROM 324 storing audio data is connected to the tone generator LSI 314. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation, instructs the video control microcomputer 312 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound. Then, processing such as lighting of the decoration lamp, motor drive control, and production time management is executed. RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are provided in the respective chips. Note that the RAM that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Although not particularly limited, a serial system is used between the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the sound source LSI 314. Data transmission / reception is performed, and data transmission / reception is performed in parallel with the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the VDP 313. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 313 includes an ultra-high speed VRAM (video RAM) 313a used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 313b, a signal conversion circuit 313c that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 313 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30. In addition, the VDP 313 notifies the video control microcomputer 312 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the video control microcomputer 312 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT is input. Further, the video control microcomputer 312 receives from the main control microcomputer 311 a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 312 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 in order to transmit and receive commands and data in the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 uses a CPU that is faster or more expensive than the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311. By providing a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 separately from the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 alone. It is possible to display on the display device 41, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost compared to the case where two CPUs having processing capabilities equivalent to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are used. Also, by providing two CPUs, it becomes possible to separately develop the control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, thereby shortening the development period of the new model.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Fluctuation start command, start opening winning effect command, starting opening winning effect design command, customer waiting demonstration command, fanfare command, probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F 331 A variation stop command, a big hit end command, an error designation command, etc. are received as an effect control command signal. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Is provided.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the surrounding frame body 40), and the front frame 12. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the frame decoration device 18 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the board, and a board effect device 44 (for example, display) provided on the game board 30 (including the surrounding frame body 40) A panel effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display in the device 41, and a frame effect device 45 provided in the front frame 12 (for example, the moving light 16). A frame effect motor control circuit 335 is provided to drive and control a motor that operates the motor. These control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps, motors and solenoids are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an on / off state of a switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12 and an effect motor switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311; an amplifier circuit 337a including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the front frame 12; An amplifier circuit 337b for driving the lower speaker 19b is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V for driving the display device 41 such as a liquid crystal display or an EL display, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving an LED or a speaker, or these DC voltages It is configured to generate a voltage of NDC 24V that is used as a reference or to turn on the power monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312, DC 3. The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC 1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a video control microcomputer 312, a VDP 313, a sound source LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps and motors, speakers, and the like. Are supplied to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, which are set in a reset state. In this embodiment, the general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 312 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 313. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 312 and the VDP 313 can be improved.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification information is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time on the general-purpose display, processing for displaying a general-purpose variable display game to be stopped is performed. If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general map display, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable members 37b and 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time. The opening control is performed as described above (for example, for 0.3 seconds).
In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed.
In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display, processing for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed.
In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state (production mode) is set, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. .
That is, the production control device 300 performs operation control of the movable production device (upper production unit 600, side production unit 700, production mechanism unit 1000) and display control of the variable display game. It can be used as a variable display means.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode on the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display and generates a special game state. I do.
In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, opens the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b, and allows the game ball to flow into the big prize opening. I do.
Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. The control (cycle game) is performed by releasing (repeating) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 10 times, or 2 times).
In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the deviation on the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game.
This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (ordinary high probability state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game.
In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 milliseconds is 600 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the general map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). Is 704 milliseconds). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 300 milliseconds is 800 milliseconds). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normally variable winning device 37 (the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric power) is not two times the first number of times of opening for one hit result of the normal figure changing display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening a plurality of times (for example, 4 times). Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map variation display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) in the normal operation state (high normal probability) State).

In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual.
Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.
In the following description and drawings, the time reduction state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, a general power support state, or a power support state.

Next, control of the gaming machine 10 will be described.
First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 84 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described.
The main process is started when the gaming machine 10 is turned on.
In this main process, as shown in FIG. 82, an interrupt vector setting process for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs is first performed after a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1). Step S2), a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs (Step S3), an interrupt mode setting process for setting an interrupt processing mode (Step S3) S4) is performed.

Next, in order to wait for the program of the payout control apparatus (payout board) 200 to start normally, for example, a time of 4 milliseconds is waited (step S5). As a result, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the game control device 100 rises first and sends the command to the payout control device 200 before the payout control device 200 starts up, and the payout control device 200 misses the command. Can be avoided.
Next, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted, and OFF data for setting no output to all output ports is output (steps S6 and S7).
Next, a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is not used in this embodiment because it performs parallel communication with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) is set to a state in which it is not used. Processing is performed (step S8).

Next, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch in the power supply device 400 is ON (step S9).
If it is determined in step S9 that the initialization switch is OFF (step S9; No), it is checked whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (step S10). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S11).
If it is determined in step S11 that the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S11; Yes), it is checked whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (Step S12), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S13).
If it is determined in step S13 that the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S13; Yes), a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is calculated (step S14), and the calculated checksum and the power interruption are calculated. The current checksum is compared (step S15), and it is determined whether the checksums match (step S16).
If it is determined in step S16 that the checksums match (step S16; Yes), the process proceeds to step S17 in FIG. 83, and processing is performed when normal recovery from a power failure is performed.

  Moreover, when it determines with the initialization switch being ON by step S9 (step S9; Yes), or when it determines with the value of a power failure inspection area | region not being normal at step S11 or step S13 (step S11; No or step S13; No) ) If it is determined in step S16 that the checksums do not match (step S16; No), the process proceeds to step S24 in FIG. 83 to perform initialization processing.

In step S17 of FIG. 83, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared (step S18), and the areas related to errors and fraud monitoring are reset (step S19).
Next, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S20).
If it is determined in step S20 that the state is not a high probability state (step S20; No), steps S21 and S22 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S23.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20 that the state is a high probability state (step S20; Yes), ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S21), and the high probability provided in the collective display device 50, for example, is set. The ON data for turning on (turning on) the notification LED (probability state display section) is saved in the segment area (step S22).
Next, a process (step S23) of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to a special figure game process number prepared for rationally executing a special figure game process described later to the effect control device 300 is performed (step S23). Proceed to S29.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S9, S11, S13, S16 to step S24, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step S24), and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. (Step S25), the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (Step S26).
Next, a time value for a period for outputting external information related to RWM clear is set (step S27), a command for turning on the power is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, the individual identification information is obtained from the individual ID register 111D, set in the serial communication circuit, and output from the information transmission unit 71.
Next, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed (step S30). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S30, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S31). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Next, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) After saving the initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the normal hit in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S32), the interruption is permitted (step S33). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Next, initial value random number update processing (step S34) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, although not particularly limited, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using a random number (big hit random number) generated in a random number generation circuit. That is, the big hit random number is a hard random number generated by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a soft random number generated by software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S34, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S35), and the power failure monitoring signal is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S36).
If it is determined in step S36 that the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S36; No), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S34). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S34) (step S33), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step S34 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

If it is determined in step S36 that the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S36; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S35. Determination is made (step S37).
If it is determined in step S37 that it is not continued (step S37; No), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S36).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S37 that it is continuing (step S37; Yes), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S38), all output ports The process of outputting OFF data to (step S39).

Next, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S40), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S41).
Next, a process for calculating the checksum when the RWM is turned off (step S42), a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S43), and a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S44) are performed. After that, it waits for the power supply of the gaming machine 10 to be cut off. As described above, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power interruption is calculated, so that the information stored in the RWM before the power interruption of the gaming machine 10 due to the power failure is properly backed up. It can be determined whether or not the gaming machine 10 is turned on again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described.
The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in CPU 111A, the timer interrupt process in FIG. 84 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first performs a register save process (step S51) for transferring a value held in a predetermined register to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.
Next, input from various sensors (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, usual gate switch 34a, general winning port switch 35a, count switch 38a, etc.), that is, the state of each input port is read. An input process (step S52) is performed.
Next, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S53) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening SOL38b, ordinary electric power SOL37c) or the like is performed.

Next, a command transmission process (step S54), a random number update process 1 (step S55), and a random number update process 2 (step S56) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the effect control device 300, the payout control device 200, and the like. )I do.
Next, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the general winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 38a, and error monitoring (front surface). A prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S57) is performed to determine whether or not the frame or the glass frame is open.
Next, a special figure game process (step S58) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game, and a general figure game process (step S59) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S60) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display games and various information related to games to display desired contents, and a magnetic sensor switch 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S61) for checking whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from, vibration fraud monitoring process (step S62) for checking whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor switch 62, External information editing processing (step S63) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer.
Next, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S64), a process of restoring the register data saved in step S51 (step S65), and an interrupt permitting process (step S65) S66) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S58) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described.
In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the special game process, the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first starts the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a. )I do.
In this start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the start winning port 36 that forms the first start winning port and the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted. The game result prior determination is performed in advance to determine the game result based on the winning in the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning.

Next, the count switch monitoring process 1 (step A2) is performed.
In the count switch monitoring process 1, a process of monitoring the count number of the count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, it is checked whether the special figure game processing timer has already expired or the special figure game process timer has been updated (-1) (step A3). It is determined whether the time is up (step A4).
If it is determined in step A4 that the special figure game process timer has expired (step A4; Yes), a special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5) is performed, and a process (step A6) of acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is performed using the table.
Next, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step A7), the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the special figure game process number.

If the special figure game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, the special figure fluctuation processing A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
Also, if the special figure game process number is “1” in step A8, the special figure is changing to set the stop display time of the special figure or to set the information necessary for performing the special figure display process. Processing (step A10) is performed.
In addition, when the special figure game process number is “2” in step A8, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit or the big win for each big hit A special chart display process (step A11) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the mouth opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

Also, if the special figure game process number is “3” in step A8, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step A12) to be performed is performed.
If the special figure game process number is “4” in step A8, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the final round is a final round, A special winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.
In step A8, if the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening, or a big hit end process The prize winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the special figure game process number is “6” in step A8, the big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure normal process (step A9) is performed.

Next, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display (step A16), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A17) related to the special figure 1 display is performed.
Next, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display (step A18), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A19) related to the special figure 2 display is performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A4 that the special figure game process timer has not expired (step A4; No), the process proceeds to step A16, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 86, in the start port switch monitoring process, the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first prepares a table for setting information on hold by the first start port (start winning award port 36) ( Step A111) and special figure start port switch common processing (step A112) are performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric winning component (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won (step). A113).
If it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (step A113; Yes), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; No), it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number. (Step A114), it is determined whether or not the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (Step A115). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal winnings thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value).

If it is determined in step A115 that the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A115; No), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) ( Step A116), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A117) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A115 that the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A115; Yes), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special-purpose start-port switch common processing (steps A112 and A117) in the above-described start-port switch monitoring processing will be described.
The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the special figure start port switch common process, the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first starts the monitoring target start port switch (the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a). For example, it is checked whether there is an input to the start port 1 switch 36a or the like (step A201), and it is determined whether there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A202).
When it is determined in step A202 that there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A202; No), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A202 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A202; Yes), after saving the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch (step A203), The extracted big hit random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A204).

Next, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings for the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times output (start port signal output number) is loaded (step A205).
Next, the start port signal output count is updated (+1) to check whether the output count overflows (step A206), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A207).
If it is determined in step A207 that the number of outputs does not overflow (step A207; No), the updated value is saved in the start signal output number area of the RWM (step A208), and the process proceeds to step A209. To do.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A207 that the output count overflows (step A207; Yes), the process proceeds to step A209.

  And, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the number of special figure hold (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) is less than the upper limit value. Is checked (step A209), and it is determined whether or not the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit value (step A210).

If it is determined in step A210 that the number of special figure hold is less than the upper limit (step A210; Yes), the number of special figure hold to be updated (for example, the number of special figure hold 1) is updated (+1). Processing (step A215) is performed.
Next, after preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (MODE) of the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A216). Then, a decoration special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step A217), and a command setting process (step A218) is performed.
Next, the address of the random number saving area corresponding to the special figure hold number is calculated (step A219), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number saving area of the RWM (step A220).

Next, the big hit symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A221), and saved in the big hit symbol random number saving area of the RWM (step A222).
Next, the corresponding variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the save area of each random number of the RWM (steps A223, A224, A225), and the special figure hold information determination process (step A226) is performed to start the special figure The mouth switch common processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A210 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (step A210; No), it is checked whether the input of the start port switch according to step A202 is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a. (Step A211), it is determined whether or not the input is the start port 1 switch 36a (Step A212).
If it is determined in step A212 that the input is for the start port 1 switch 36a (step A212; Yes), a decoration special figure hold number command (hold overflow command) is prepared (step A213), and command setting processing (step A214) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A212 that the input of the start port 1 switch 36a is not input (step A212; No), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A226) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described.
The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the special figure hold information determination process, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first determines whether or not a winning of the starting port 2 (winning to the normal variable winning device 37) is made. (Step A231).
If it is determined in step A231 that the start port 2 has been won (step A231; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is at a high probability (high probability state) (step A233).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A231 that the start port 2 is not won (step A231; No), it is determined whether or not the electric support (short time state) or big hit (special game state) is being performed (step A232). ).

If it is determined in step A232 that the electric support or big hit is being made (step A232; Yes), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A232 that there is no power support or big hit (step A232; No), it is determined whether or not it is a high probability (high probability state) (step A233).

If it is determined in step A233 that the probability is high (step A233; Yes), a determination value for high probability is set (step A234), and the target big hit random number is loaded (step A236). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A237).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A233 that it is not a high probability (step A233; No), a determination value for a low probability (normal probability state) is set (step A235), and the target big hit random number is loaded (step A235). Step A236). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A237).

When it is determined in step A237 that it is a big hit (step A237; Yes), a big hit symbol information table (see FIG. 90) corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A238), and the target big hit symbol random number is set. Is loaded (step A239). Thereafter, symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired from the set jackpot symbol information table (step A240), a symbol information command corresponding to the acquired symbol information is prepared (step A242), and command setting processing is performed (step A240). Step A243).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A237 that the game is not a big hit (step A237; No), the symbol information is obtained (step A241), and the symbol information command corresponding to the acquired symbol information is prepared (step A242). Then, command setting processing is performed (step A243).

Next, the target variation pattern random number 1 is loaded (step A244), a variation pattern random number command corresponding to the target variation pattern random number 1 is prepared (step A245), command setting processing is performed (step A246), The hold information determination process ends.
By this processing, a special figure holding number command is transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the occurrence of the start memory, and then the special figure type / symbol information command and the variation pattern random number are given as pre-determined information (pre-determined command). Command is sent. Then, the production control device 300 increases the special figure start memory number based on the decoration special figure reservation number command, and performs a pre-production (prefetching production) based on the symbol information command and the variation pattern random number command.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as a pre-determination unit that can determine the result of the variable display game based on the start-up memory before the execution of the variable display game.

  Thereby, the determination result (prefetching result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 alert | reports a result relevant information to a player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game by changing the decoration special figure start memory display m1 displayed on the display apparatus 41, etc. It becomes possible.

  Here, for jackpot random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers that need to improve confidentiality (influence the results), the result information after determination is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as symbol information commands. On the other hand, for the fluctuation pattern random number that does not need to improve confidentiality (does not affect the result), as the fluctuation pattern random number command, the random number value is left as it is or converted into information indicating the random value, and the effect control device 300 To send to. Note that the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system (variation group) of the second half fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a random number for performing detailed distribution from the reach system. Pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation. Since it is sufficient that even the reach system can be transmitted to the production control device 300 side at the time of prior determination, information regarding the fluctuation pattern random number 1 may be transmitted.

Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.
Further, the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 3 may be included in the variation pattern random number command, or a command indicating the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 may be transmitted instead of the variation pattern random number command. Anyway. That is, all the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 may be transmitted to the effect control device 300, or the variation pattern number may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 after the variation pattern is determined as at the start of the variation. good.

Here, FIG. 90A shows a jackpot symbol information table corresponding to the start port 1 switch 36a in the present embodiment, and FIG. 90B shows a jackpot symbol information corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the present embodiment. An information table is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b), the special results are set with a plurality of types in which the special game state execution mode and the additional game value given to the player after the special game state ends are different. The game control device 100 selects a special result based on the jackpot symbol random number extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening. That is, it can be said that the execution mode of the special gaming state and the amount of additional game value are determined based on the jackpot symbol random number.
It should be noted that the execution mode of the special gaming state in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes the number of rounds that can be executed, the opening time of the big winning opening, and the type of the big winning opening to be opened (upper AT (second special variable winning apparatus 39 ), Lower AT (first special variable winning device 38)). In other words, the game control device 100 serves as an opening / closing determination means that can determine the type of the variable winning device to be opened / closed in the special game. The game control device 100 is configured to determine the open / close mode (the number of rounds in the case of the present embodiment) of the variable winning device that performs open / close conversion in a special game from among a plurality of open / close modes having different degrees of advantage for the player Has been.
Further, the additional game value means that the game state is set to a high probability state until the next special result mode is derived after the special game state ends, or a special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game state ends. It is to be in a short time state.
Further, based on the jackpot symbol random number, it is also determined whether the probability state is notified (probability clear) or not notified (probability ambiguous) after the end of the special gaming state.
In addition, the distribution of special results is such that the probability that a special result advantageous to the player is selected in the second special figure variation display game is higher than that in the first special figure variation display game.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 89, in the special figure normal processing, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first checks whether the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A301). ), It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step A302).
If it is determined in step A302 that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A302; Yes), it is checked whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (step A303). ), It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step A304).
If it is determined in step A304 that the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step A304; Yes), it is checked whether the normal figure hold number (common figure start storage number) is 0 (step A305). Then, it is determined whether or not the usual figure hold number is 0 (step A306).

If it is determined in step A306 that the number of normal maps is 0 (step A306; Yes), it is determined whether or not the normal variation display game is being executed (step A307).
If it is determined in step A307 that the normal map change display game is not being executed (step B307; No), it is determined whether or not the normal map change display game is being hit (step A308).
If it is determined in step A308 that the game is not hit by the normal map display game (step A08; No), it is checked whether the customer waiting demo has already started (step A309), and the customer waiting demo has already started. It is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A310).

If it is determined in step A310 that the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; No), a customer waiting demo flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311). Then, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A312), a command setting process (step A313), a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A314) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A306 that the number of pending maps is not 0 (step A306; No), or when it is determined in step A307 that the map fluctuation display game is being executed (step A307; Yes), in step A308. If it is determined that the game is in the middle of the normal map display game (step A308; Yes), or if it is determined in step A310 that the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A310; Yes), the special figure Processing transition setting processing 1 (step A314) is performed, and the special figure routine processing is terminated.
In the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, a process number “0” relating to the special figure normal process, a flag (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) for defining a special prize opening fraud monitoring period, and the like are set.
In this way, by determining not only the special figure fluctuation display game but also the state of the common figure fluctuation display game and determining whether or not the customer is waiting, it is possible to improve the determination accuracy of whether or not the customer is waiting. be able to.

  Further, when it is determined in step A302 that the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step A302; No), or when it is determined in step A304 that the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step A304; No), the special figure 2 hold number is not zero. A jackpot flag setting process (step A315) is performed for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a jackpot.

  Next, a special symbol stop symbol setting process (step A316), which is a process related to the setting of a special symbol stop symbol (symbol information), specifically, a special symbol stop symbol determination process based on the presence / absence of a big hit flag and a symbol random number. ), The signal corresponding to the special figure stop symbol number of the set special figure stop symbol is saved in the test signal output data area (step A317), and the symbol information is saved as the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2). ) Is saved in the symbol information (work) area corresponding to ().

Next, the special figure fluctuation flag corresponding to the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A319), and a table for setting information regarding the fluctuation pattern is prepared (step A320).
Next, a variation pattern setting process (step A321) for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game and a variation start information setting process (step A322) for setting variation start information are performed. In this variation start information setting process, a variation pattern command including information related to a variation pattern of the special-figure variation display game, a decoration special-figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (stop result mode) information related to the ornament special-figure variation display game, and display A decoration special figure hold number command (decoration special figure hold number command) related to the decoration special figure start memory display m1 displayed on the device 41 is prepared. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Subsequently, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A323) is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated. In the special figure changing process transition setting process, the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process, the information relating to the end of the customer waiting demonstration, the test signal relating to the change of the first special figure, or the second special figure Test signal during fluctuation, information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display (for example, flag relating to fluctuation of the special figure 1 display, period of blinking of the special figure 1 display) The initial value of the timer, etc.) or information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display (for example, the flag relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display, the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display) Perform processing to set the initial value of the timer.

  In this way, when the special figure 2 hold number in step A301 and step A302 is checked before the special figure 1 hold number check in steps A303 and A304, the special figure 2 hold number is not zero. Is executed from the big hit flag setting process (step A315) based on the second start memory to the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A323), the special figure 2 hold number is 0, and the special figure 1 hold number is not 0. In this case, the special chart changing process transition setting process (step A323) is executed from the big hit flag setting process (step A315) based on the first start memory. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (step A321) in the above-described special figure routine process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 91, in the variation pattern setting process, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first checks whether the symbol information (for work) is off symbol information (step A331), and the off symbol is displayed. It is determined whether it is information (step A332).
If it is determined in step A332 that the symbol information is out of place (step A332; Yes), a variation group selection table (see FIGS. 93 and 94) corresponding to the current gaming state is prepared (step A333). The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step A335).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A332 that the symbol information is not out of step (step A332; No), the big hit time fluctuation group selection table (see FIG. 92) corresponding to the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is displayed. Prepare (step A334), and load and prepare the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target area (step A335).

Next, a 2-byte distribution process (step A336) is performed, and the address of the reach system obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A337).
Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step A338), and a sorting process (step A339) is performed to obtain the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the sorting (step A340).
Next, the latter half change number is saved in the target latter half change number area (step A341), and it is checked whether the latter half change number is a reachless change number (step A342). Determine (step A343).

If it is determined in step A343 that the number is a variation without reach (step A343; Yes), the first half variation selection table 1 (for no reach) is prepared (step A344), and the variation pattern random number 3 is obtained from the target region. Is prepared by loading (step A346).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A343 that the number is not a non-reach variation number (step A343; No), the first half variation selection table 2 (for reach) is prepared (step A345), and the variation pattern random number 3 from the target region is prepared. Is prepared by loading (step A346).
Next, a sorting process is performed (step A347), and the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (step A348), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.
With the above processing, a variation group (any of reach, normal reach, SP1 to 4 reach, or common variation (described later)) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1, and detailed variation is selected from the variation groups based on the variation pattern random number 2. The distribution of effects (selection of variation pattern) is performed, and the variation mode of the first half variation until reaching the reach state is selected based on the variation pattern random number 3.

In the variation group selection table at the time of big hit shown in FIG. 92, only the variation group that reaches the reach state can be selected. Also, SP4 reach can be selected only in the case of the second special figure variation display game.
In the variation group selection table at the time of losing of the first special figure variation display game and the variation group selection table at the time of detachment of the second special figure variation display game, a table to be used depending on whether or not it is in the short time state (the public power support state). The table of FIG. 93 is used when the state is different and the time is not short (normal power support state) (when the normal figure is in a low probability state). Use a table.

Further, the table to be used differs depending on the first start memory number, and when the time is not short, the first start memory number is 1 when the first start memory number is 1, that is, when the first special figure variable display game is started. 93, the table in FIG. 93A is used for the special figure variation display game, and the table in FIG. 93B is used when the first start memory number is 2, 3 or 4. The larger the first start memory number, the shorter the reach time and the normal reach variation time, so that the first start memory can be quickly digested.
Similarly, in the case of the second start memory, the table to be used differs depending on the second start memory number. When the second start memory number is changed from 1 to 0, the table of FIG. 93 (c) is used for the special figure variation display game, and when the second start memory number is 2, 3 or 4, FIG. Use a table. The larger the second start memory number, the shorter the reach time of no reach and normal reach, so that the second start memory can be quickly digested.

In the short-time state, when the first start memory number is 1, that is, when the first start memory number is changed from 1 to 0 by the start of the first special figure change display game, the special figure change display is performed. The table of FIG. 94 (a) is used for the game, and the table of FIG. 94 (b) is used when the first start memory number is 2, 3 or 4. Also in this case, when the number of first start memories is large, there is no reach and the fluctuation time of normal reach is shortened, so that the first start memories can be quickly digested. In addition, the fluctuation time without reach when the first start memory number is 1 is longer than the fluctuation time without reach when not in the short-time state, and the special time fluctuation in the short-time state which is advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state The display game is prevented from being interrupted.
Similarly, in the case of the second start memory, when the time is short, the second start memory number is changed from 1 to 0 when the second start memory number is 1, that is, by the start of the second special figure variable display game. Sometimes, the table shown in FIG. 94C is used for the special figure variation display game, and the table shown in FIG. 94D is used when the second start memory number is 2, 3 or 4. Also in this case, when the number of second start memories is large, there is no reach and the fluctuation time of normal reach is shortened, so that the second start memories can be quickly digested.

Here, the fluctuation group of non-reach and normal reach is defined as a common fluctuation. When the common variation is selected, the effect control device 300 is configured to determine whether to select a variation group without reach or a variation group with normal reach. This common variation is longer than the unreachable variation time when not in the short-time state, and prevents the special-variation display game from being interrupted in the short-time state that is advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state.
That is, when the second start memory number is a specific number (here, 1) at the start of the special figure variation display game in the short time state, as a variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. The common variation (reach presence / absence common) which is a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is selected with a high probability from a plurality of types of variation patterns having different variation times. Further, in the short time state, when the start memory is larger than a specific number (here, 1) at the start of the special figure variation display game, it is not determined during the normal game state from a plurality of types of variation patterns. The variation pattern with the shortest variation time (here, the variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds) is selected with high probability. As a result, the start-up memory is quickly digested to prevent overflow. If it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result even in the short time state, the variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of start memories, and the common variation is not selected.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (step A322) in the above-described special figure routine process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 95, in the change start information setting process, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first clears the random number save areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step A401).
Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A402), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A403).
Next, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A404), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A405).

Next, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A406), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A407).
Next, a fluctuation command (MODE) corresponding to the first-half fluctuation number is calculated and prepared (step A408), the value of the second-half fluctuation number is prepared as a fluctuation command (ACTION) (step A409), and command setting processing is performed (step A409). Step A410).

Next, a symbol information command is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area (step A411), and command setting processing is performed (step A412).
Next, a decoration special figure holding number command (MODE) corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A413), the address of the random number saving area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A414), and the variation symbol discrimination is performed. The special figure hold count corresponding to the flag is updated by -1 (step A415).
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step A416), and command setting processing is performed (step A417).
Next, the random number saving area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is shifted (step A418), the shifted empty area is cleared to 0 (step A419), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game including information regarding the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set and transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. At the time of prior determination, the value of the variation pattern random number 1 is transmitted as it is to the effect control device 300, but at the start of variation, the game control device 100 determines a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number, and the variation pattern information after the determination ( Number) is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described.
As described above, the effect control device 300 includes the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 that performs video control under the control of the main control microcomputer 311.
The control process by the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 mainly includes a 1st main process shown in FIG. 96 and an interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 2 milliseconds).

[1st main processing]
First, the 1st main process will be described.
In this 1st main process, as shown in FIG. 96, the process at the start of the program is first performed.
In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step B1), and various initialization processes for initializing the CPU, setting the initial value of the RAM, initializing random numbers, etc. are performed (step B2). Then, various interrupt timers are started (step B3), and interrupts are permitted (step B4).

In this 1st main process, a loop process is then performed as the main loop process.
In this loop process, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step B5), and an effect button input process (step B6) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. .
Next, a game control command analysis process (step B7) is performed. In this game control command analysis process, it is determined whether or not a command related to a game transmitted from the game control device 100 has been correctly received. If the command has been correctly received, the command is determined and a scene control process to be described later is performed. Process to classify commands for

  Next, a test mode process (step B8) which is a process related to a test mode for testing the display device 41, the decoration device, the rendering device, and the like is performed. When the test mode is set to the test mode, the subsequent game processing is not performed. However, in the test mode, when performing display on the display device 41, output of sound from the speaker, light emission of the LED of the decoration device, operation of the effect device, etc., processing for controlling these (steps B11 to B13 described later) ) Is controlled. Note that the test mode ends when the gaming machine 10 is powered off.

Next, a 1st scene control process (step B9) related to the control of game effects is performed.
Next, an effect command editing process (step B10) for editing a command output to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 is performed.
Next, a sound control process (step B11) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), a decoration control process (step B12) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. ), Motor / SOL control processing (step B13) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 45 is performed.
Next, a random number update process (step B14) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step B5).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing will be described.
In this interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 97, first, timer update processing (step B21) for updating a soft timer managed by a program is performed.
Next, an input process (step B22) for processing a signal input to the effect control device 300 and an output process (step B23) for processing a signal output from the effect control device 300 are performed.
Next, a main command reception process (step B24) for receiving a command related to a game transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 is performed, and the interrupt process is terminated.

[2nd main processing]
The video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 of the effect control device 300 performs 2nd main processing shown in FIG.
In the 2nd main process, as shown in FIG. 98, the process at the start of the program is first performed.
As a process at the time of starting the program, first, a CPU initialization process for initializing the CPU (step C1) is performed, the RAM is cleared to 0 (step C2), and an initial value of the RAM is set (step C3).
Next, VDP initialization processing (step C4) for initializing the VDP 313 is performed, and various interrupts are permitted (step C5).
Next, initialization processing of various control processes (step C6) is performed, and screen drawing is permitted (step C7).

In the 2nd main process, a loop process is performed as a main loop process.
In this loop processing, first, the system cycle wait flag is cleared (step C8), and it is determined whether or not the system cycle wait flag is 1 (step C9). The system cycle is a cycle for switching between two buffers for temporarily storing image data. When the switching is enabled, the system cycle flag is “1”.
Until the system cycle wait flag becomes 1, the determination whether the system cycle wait flag is 1 is repeated (step C9). When the system cycle wait flag becomes 1 (step C9; Yes), WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C10).

Next, a received command check process (step C11) is performed. In this received command check process, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 has been correctly received. If the command has been correctly received, the command is determined and the 2nd scene control process is performed. Process to classify commands for
Next, a 2nd scene control process (step C12) for determining display contents is performed based on the received command. In this 2nd scene control process, a notice character or the like or a display priority order is set, and an effect image corresponding to the progress of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, background processing (step C13) for setting the background is performed. In this background process, a process of displaying a background according to the gaming state (whether there is a probability state or a waiting state for customers), the gaming mode, the production mode, the reach scene, and the like is performed.
Subsequently, a variation display process (step C14) which is a display control process related to the variation of the identification information in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the display device is interlocked with the display of the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display. A hold display process (step C15) for setting the decoration special figure start memory display m1 displayed on the display 41 is performed. In this hold display process, a process related to the display of a pre-effect (pre-read effect) that changes the display mode of the decoration special drawing start memory display m1 is also performed based on the pre-effect information stored in the start storage area.

Next, a customer waiting demo process (step C16) regarding the display of the customer waiting demo is performed. In this customer waiting demonstration process, processing relating to setting of a customer waiting screen for displaying characters, videos, etc., processing relating to setting of notification display to be displayed on the customer waiting screen, and the like are performed.
Next, the ROM data is transferred to the buffer set in the RAM, the display system process (step C17) for performing the actual display process is performed, and the process returns to the process for clearing the system cycle wait flag (step C8).

[1st scene control processing]
Next, details of the 1st scene control process (step B9) in the 1st main process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 99, in the 1st scene control process, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the test mode (step B31).
If it is determined in step B31 that the test mode is being executed (step B31; Yes), the 1st scene control process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B31 that the test mode is not in effect (step B31; No), it is determined whether a scene change command has been received (step B32). This scene change command includes various commands relating to games transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (power-on command, power failure recovery command, customer waiting demo command, variation pattern command, symbol stop command, jackpot fanfare command, N-th open command, interval command, etc.).

If it is determined in step B32 that a scene change command has been received (step B32; Yes), the game state to be updated (current game state) is acquired (step B33), and the current scene change command received is received. It is determined whether or not the game state is valid, that is, whether or not the command is valid (step B34).
If it is determined in step B34 that the command is valid (step B34; Yes), the received command is saved (step B35), an effect request flag is set (step B36), and the command identifier of the received command Branch processing (step B37) is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B32 that a scene change command has not been received (step B32; No), or if it is determined that the command is not valid in step B34 (step B34; No), the command of the received command Branch processing based on the identifier (step B37) is performed. In this case, a branch is performed based on the identifier of the command that was most recently valid.

In the branch process based on the command identifier (step B37), a process to be executed is selected based on the received command.
When a power-on command is received, a power-on process (step B38) for performing a process necessary when the power is turned on is performed.
When a power failure recovery command is received, a power failure recovery (other than waiting for a customer) process (step B39) for performing processing necessary at the time of power failure recovery is performed.
When a customer waiting demo command is received, a customer waiting process (step B40) for performing processing related to the display of the customer waiting demo is performed.

  In addition, when a variation pattern command is received, a variation processing (step B41) is performed in which processing relating to the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed. In the changing process, information necessary to play the decorative special figure changing display game is set. In the setting of information necessary for playing this decoration special figure variation display game, for example, production based on information included in the variation pattern command transmitted from the game control device 100 (whether it is a big hit, variation pattern information, etc.) (Variation pattern, variation time, etc.) are set.

When a symbol stop command is received, a symbol stop process (step B42), which is a process of stopping the variation display of the identification information in the decorative special symbol variation display game and displaying the result mode, is performed. In the symbol stop process, the stop display time of the result in the decorative special symbol variation display game is set.
If a fanfare command is received, a big hit fanfare process (step B43), which is a process related to the start of the special game state, is performed.
In addition, when the big-open-release n-th command is received, a big hit round process (step B44), which is a process related to the round game, is performed.
When an interval command is received, a big hit interval process (step B45), which is a process related to the interval between rounds, is performed.
When an ending command is received, a big hit ending process (step B46), which is a process related to the end of the special gaming state, is performed.

After performing each of the above-described processes selected by the branch process based on the command identifier (step B37), a process based on a command that is not immediately reflected in the video is performed.
As this process, first, a hold number command reception process (step B47) is performed to perform processing based on a hold number command (special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command) including information on increase / decrease of startup memory. A decoration special figure command reception process (step B48) is performed for performing a process based on a special decoration figure command including information related to the stop symbol of the figure variation display game.

Next, based on a pre-determination command (symbol information command, variation pattern random number command) including a result of a pre-reading process for predetermining the result of the special symbol variation display game based on the start-up memory before the execution of the special symbol variation display game Pre-determination command reception processing (step B49) for performing processing is performed.
Next, a probability information command reception process (step B50) is performed in which a corresponding value is internally set and a background command is transmitted to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 based on a probability information command including information on the probability state. Then, the 1st scene control process ends.

[Waiting for customers]
Next, details of the customer waiting process (step B40) in the first scene control process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 100, in the customer waiting process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first receives a customer waiting demo command transmitted from the game control device 100 when the customer waiting state is entered. It is determined whether or not it has been received (step B101).

If it is determined in step B101 that a customer waiting demo command has been received (step B101; Yes), a customer waiting shutter mode is set (step B102). Thus, the drive source 1613 included in the left shutter drive unit 1610 and the drive source 1713 included in the right shutter drive unit 1710 of the shutter unit 1500 are controlled in the motor / SOL control process (step B13) of the 1st main process (FIG. 96). Thus, each shutter (left back shutter unit 1630, left front shutter unit 1650, right back shutter unit 1730, right front shutter unit 1750) moves from the initial position to the shielding position.
Here, the game control device 100 serves as a customer waiting state determination means for determining whether or not the game is in a waiting state for a customer, and the effect control device 300 is in the waiting state for the customer. Based on the determination, a customer waiting operation means for executing a predetermined customer waiting operation is provided.

Next, a shutter operating flag is set (step B103), and it is determined whether or not the shutter operation is completed (step B104).
If it is determined in step B104 that the shutter operation has not been completed (step B104; No), that is, if each shutter has not reached the shielding position, the customer waiting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B104 that the shutter operation has been completed (step B104; Yes), that is, if each shutter has reached the shielding position, the shutter operating flag is reset (cleared) (step S104). B105), a customer waiting display mode is set (step B106) to darken the display screen of the display device 41 (that is, to make it non-display state). In this embodiment, when the customer waiting display mode is set, the display screen of the display device 41 is darkened while the display device 41 is turned on (that is, a black screen is displayed on the display device 41). However, the display device 41 is configured to be converted into a power saving state (that is, a state in which power consumption is suppressed more than in a normal state), but is not limited thereto. When the customer waiting display mode is set, for example, the display device 41 can be configured to be converted to a low luminance state by turning off the power of the display device 41, or The display device 41 is converted to a low-brightness state by lowering the brightness of the backlight as compared with the case where the display mode for the customer is not set on the display device 41 with the power on (that is, in the normal state). It is also possible to constitute so. Such a low luminance state can be realized by controlling all the backlights of the display device 41, but can also be realized by setting some backlights to low luminance in the low luminance state.

  That is, the production control device 300 (customer waiting operation means) operates the production mechanism unit 1000 (movable production device) to convert the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) to the shielding state, and the display device 41 is changed from the normal state to the normal state. It is configured to convert to a power saving state (low luminance state) in which power consumption is suppressed compared to the normal state. At that time, the effect control device 300 is configured to convert the display device 41 to the power saving state (low luminance state) after the conversion of the shutter unit 1500 to the shielding state is completed.

  Next, the customer waiting decoration mode is set (step B107), and the customer waiting process is terminated. Thereby, in the decoration control process (step B12) of the 1st main process (FIG. 96), the LEDs (that is, the LEDs provided on the LED board 1635 of the left back shutter unit 1630, the left front shutter unit 1650) are provided. LED provided in the LED board 1655, 1655, LED provided in the LED board of the right rear shutter unit 1730, LED provided in the LED board of the right front shutter unit 1750), LED provided in the center case unit 40 (specifically, 101, the LEDs of the left light emitting unit 461 and the right light emitting unit 462 that illuminate the decorative lens member 460, the LEDs included in the LED substrate 652 of the decorative movable unit 650 of the upper effect unit 600, and the like are controlled as shown in FIG. Light. Thereby, even if the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielding state and the display area R of the display device 41 is shielded by each shutter, the player can understand that the gaming machine 10 is operating.

That is, LEDs provided in the center case unit 40 (LEDs of the left light emitting unit 461 and the right light emitting unit 462 that illuminate the decorative lens member 460, and LEDs provided on the LED substrate 652 of the decorative movable unit 650 of the upper effect unit 600) However, it forms a decorative light emitting unit capable of performing a decorative operation by emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode. Then, the production control device 300 (customer waiting operation means) is configured to cause the decoration light emitting unit to emit light in a predetermined customer waiting mode based on the determination that the game control device 100 is in the customer waiting state.
Further, LEDs provided in each shutter (LEDs provided in the LED board 1635 of the left back shutter unit 1630, LEDs provided in the LED boards 1655 and 1655 of the left front shutter unit 1650, and LED boards of the right back shutter unit 1730 are provided. LED, the LED provided on the LED substrate of the right front shutter unit 1750) constitutes an effect light emitting unit capable of causing the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. Then, the production control device 300 (customer waiting operation means) is configured to cause the production light emitting unit to emit light in a predetermined customer waiting mode based on the determination that the game control device 100 is in the customer waiting state. In the case of the customer waiting state, the effect light emitting unit may emit light with a lower brightness than usual, or a smaller number of LEDs may be caused to emit light, or a smaller number than usual. These LEDs may emit light with low luminance.

If it is determined in step B101 that the customer waiting demo command has not been received (step B101; No), it is determined whether or not the shutter operating flag is set (step B108).
If it is determined in step B108 that the shutter operating flag is set (step B108; Yes), the process proceeds to step B104.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B108 that the shutter operating flag is not set (step B108; No), the customer waiting process is terminated.

[Fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the changing process (step B41) in the first scene control process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 102, in the changing process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not there is an effect request flag (step B201). The effect request flag is a flag that is set when a valid command is received. When there is this flag, processing based on the received command is performed.

If it is determined in step B201 that there is an effect request flag (step B201; Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing process is a changing process that is executed first after returning from the customer waiting state. (Step B202).
If it is determined in step B202 that the changing process is not the changing process that is executed first after returning from the waiting state (step B202; No), the process proceeds to step B205.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B202 that the changing process is a changing process that is executed first after returning from the waiting state (step B202; Yes), a shutter return operation is set (step B202). B203). Thus, the drive source 1613 included in the left shutter drive unit 1610 and the drive source 1713 included in the right shutter drive unit 1710 of the shutter unit 1500 are controlled in the motor / SOL control process (step B13) of the 1st main process (FIG. 96). Thus, each shutter (left back shutter unit 1630, left front shutter unit 1650, right back shutter unit 1730, right front shutter unit 1750) moves from the shielding position to the initial position.

Next, a normal display mode for turning the display screen of the display device 41 (that is, bringing it into a display state) is set (step B204). As a result, the display device 41 returns from the power saving state to the normal state.
Thus, in the present embodiment, unlike the case where the display device 41 is converted to the power saving state (low luminance state) (see step B106 in FIG. 100), the display device 41 is kept in the normal state without waiting for the completion of the shutter operation. Is configured to convert to
That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a customer waiting release unit that releases the customer waiting operation based on the determination that the game control device 100 (customer waiting state determination unit) has returned from the customer waiting state. At this time, the effect control device 300 operates the effect mechanism unit 1000 (movable effect device) to convert the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) to the released state, and also displays the display device 41 before the conversion to the released state is completed. It is configured to return from the power saving state (low luminance state) to the normal state.
In this embodiment, the normal display mode setting (step B204) is executed after the shutter return operation setting (step B203) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal display mode is set. It is also possible to configure so that the setting of the shutter return operation (step B203) is executed after the setting (step B204) is executed.

  Next, the PB information that is information related to the input of the effect button 25 is cleared (step B205), and the movable body request set process (step B206) is performed. Based on the change start command (design information command and change pattern command) and the effect mode from the game control device 100, a change effect pattern setting process (step B207) for setting details of the change effect pattern is performed.

  Next, an accessory action pattern setting process (step B208) and a random number seed initialization process (step B209) are performed to set a scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern (step B210). The scene sequence table is a table for managing the execution timing and time of various displays such as the start and stop of the variable display and the display of the effect character in the decoration special figure variable display game. In the scene sequence table, the execution order of a plurality of scenes in which execution contents and time are defined is set, and the decorative special figure variation display game is executed by sequentially executing the scenes according to the scene sequence table.

  Next, a variation time setting process (step B211) for setting the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed, and the first scene and the scene update timer are set (step B212). Then, the effect request flag is cleared (step B213), and the changing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step B201 that there is no production request flag (step B201; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the scene update timer is 0 (step B214). The scene update timer measures the execution time of the scene managed according to the scene sequence table, and the value of this scene update timer being 0 indicates that the scene being executed has ended.
If it is determined in step B214 that the value of the scene update timer is not 0 (step B214; No), the changing process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B214 that the value of the scene update timer is 0 (step B214; Yes), the next normal scene data is set (step B215). As a result, a new scene is started and a predetermined value corresponding to the scene is set in the scene update timer.

Next, the accessory action pattern information set in the accessory action pattern setting process (step B208) is acquired (step B216), and it is determined whether or not it is the accessory action timing (step B217).
If it is determined in step B217 that it is not an accessory operation timing (step B217; No), the changing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B217 that it is the accessory action timing (step B217; Yes), the action of the accessory corresponding to the accessory action timing is set (step B218), and the change is made. End the middle process. Thereby, the motor / SOL control process (step B13) of the first main process (FIG. 96) controls the driving source that generates the driving force for operating the corresponding accessory, and the corresponding accessory operates. To do.

  In addition, in a variable display game that is performing a shutter return operation, it may be configured to delay the generation of the notice effect of the variable display game from the normal and generate the notice effect after the shutter is fully restored. It is possible, and instead of delaying the occurrence of the notice effect, it is possible to omit the notice effect on the display by the display device 41 and perform only the notice effect with the sound of the speakers 19a and 19b. It is.

[Functional action pattern setting process]
Next, details of the accessory action pattern setting process (step B208) in the above-described changing process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 103, in the accessory action pattern setting process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first prepares an accessory action selection table (see FIG. 104) (step B221). The effect unit operation mode corresponding to the change start command (symbol information command and change pattern command) from the game control device 100 is acquired (step B222). Then, the accessory action pattern information such as the accessory action timing of the effect unit is set (step B223), and the accessory action pattern setting process is terminated.

  For example, in the case where “1 type (○○) rolling operation” is acquired as the production unit operation mode in step B222, the operation of the accessory corresponding to the operation timing of the changing process (FIG. 102) is set (step B218). Thus, the operation of one type of accessory (XX) is set. Further, when “N types (XX & XX ...) rolling action” is acquired as the production unit action mode, the action setting corresponding to the action timing of the changing process (FIG. 102) is set (step B218). Thus, the operation of N types of objects (XX & XX ...) is set.

  Here, when XX in the parenthesis is “upper”, the operation of the upper effect unit 600 is set for each accessory, and the turning operation by the upper effect unit 600 is started. At this time, as the turning operation by the upper effect unit 600, for example, an operation in which the decoration movable unit 650 slides up and down repeatedly for a predetermined period is executed.

  Further, when XX in parentheses is “side part”, the operation of the side effect unit 700 is set for each accessory, and the turning operation by the side effect unit 700 is started. At this time, as the turning operation by the side effect unit 700, for example, the base end side movable body 752 repeatedly rotates left and right while maintaining the state in which the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are magnetically attracted for a predetermined period. (Ie, the joint J repeatedly bends and stretches) is performed.

  Also, in the case where XX in the parenthesis is “lower”, the operation of the effect movable unit 1400 is set for each accessory, and the turning operation by the effect movable unit 1400 is started. At this time, as the turning operation of the effect movable unit 1400, for example, the movable portion 1410 repeatedly moves up and down for a predetermined period, or the movable portion 1410 moves upward from the initial position and reaches the predetermined position. In the state, the operation etc. in which the effect movable member 1414 rotates are executed. Note that this rotation of the effect movable member 1414 may be configured to always be performed when the movable portion 1410 reaches a predetermined position, or is performed according to the degree of expectation that the variable display game will have a special result. You may comprise.

  Further, in the case where XX in parentheses is “shutter”, the operation of the shutter unit 1500 is set for each accessory, and the turning operation by the shutter unit 1500 is started. Accordingly, as the turning operation of the shutter unit 1500, for example, each shutter (or only the front shutter) repeatedly slides to the left and right during a predetermined period, and the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielding state during the predetermined period. The following operations are executed.

  Here, when the operation of the shutter unit 1500 and the operation of the effect movable unit 1400 are set at the same time, for example, when “shutter & lower part” is included in parentheses, the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielding state, for example. (That is, after each shutter reaches the shielding position), the movable unit 1410 moves upward from the initial position, and the movable unit 1410 reaches the predetermined position, and the shutter unit 1500 is switched to the release state, and the operation of moving each shutter to the initial position is executed. That is, after the movable unit 1410 (movable effect member) completes the conversion of the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) to the shielding state, the display region R (display) is displayed from a position shifted from the front of the display region R (ie, the initial position). The left back shutter unit 1630 and the right back shutter unit 1730 (back side shielding member) (ie, between the left back shutter unit 1630 and the right back shutter unit 1730). In addition, an operation of advancing into the effect space Q (see FIG. 75) formed behind the left front shutter unit 1650 and the right front shutter unit 1750 (front shielding member) is performed. The effect movable member 1414 may be rotated after the movable portion 1410 reaches the predetermined position. In this case, the effect movable member 1414 may be rotated before the conversion to the release state of the shutter unit 1500 is completed. Alternatively, the effect movable member 1414 may be rotated after the conversion of the shutter unit 1500 to the released state is completed.

Specifically, for example, when “one type (side portion) rolling operation” is acquired as the production unit operation mode information, the operation setting of the accessory corresponding to the operation timing of the changing process (FIG. 102) (steps) In B218), the operation of the side effect unit 700 is set.
Also, for example, when “4 types of composite (side & upper & shutter & lower) turning operation” is acquired as the production unit operation mode information, the action of the accessory corresponding to the operation timing of the changing process (FIG. 102) (Step B218), the operations of the side effect unit 700, the upper effect unit 600, the shutter unit 1500, and the effect movable unit 1400 are set.

  Here, the accessory action selection table (see FIG. 103 (a)) that is referred to when the symbol information command is out-of-order symbol information and the accessory action selection that is referenced when the symbol information command is jackpot symbol information. Comparing with the table (see FIG. 103 (b)), when the symbol information command is out-of-sequence symbol information, when the reach system information is “normal reach”, the production unit operation mode is “1 type (upper) rolling operation”. However, if the symbol information command is jackpot symbol information, “one type (upper) rolling operation” may be acquired as the production unit operation mode when the reach system information is “normal reach”. In addition, when the symbol information command is out-of-order symbol information, “1 type (shutter) turning operation” is not acquired as the rendering unit operation mode, but when the symbol information command is jackpot symbol information, the rendering unit operation is performed. In some cases, “one type (shutter) turning operation” is acquired.

Therefore, when the reach system information is “normal reach”, “1 type (upper) turning operation” is acquired as the production unit operation mode, or “1 type (shutter) operation is performed as the production unit operation mode regardless of the reach system information”. When “motion” is acquired, it can be said that the jackpot is confirmed.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, when “1 type (upper) turning operation” is acquired as the production unit operation mode when the reach system information is “normal reach”, the production unit operation mode is “1” regardless of the reach system information. In both cases (or any one of them) when the “seed (shutter) turning operation” is acquired, a one-shot notification effect for informing the jackpot confirmation is executed.
Here, the effect control device 300 serves as one notification means capable of executing a one notification effect that notifies that the result of the variable display game is derived before the result of the variable display game is derived. .

In the case of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and (b), the type of special variable winning device (large winning opening) that is opened as an execution mode of the special gaming state is based on the jackpot symbol random number. Although it is determined, the one-notification effect is executed by causing the determined special variable winning device to emit light.
Specifically, for example, when the upper AT (second special variable winning device 39) is determined as the type of the special variable winning device to be opened, as shown in FIG. The LED included in the LED board 395 of the special prize winning device 39 is turned on (or flashes), and a sound for notifying the jackpot confirmation from the upper speaker 19a (in the case of this embodiment, “Cuin! Cuin!”) Is output. To do.
Also, for example, when the lower AT (first special variable winning device 38) is determined as the type of the special variable winning device to be opened, as shown in FIG. The LED included in the LED board 382a, 383a, 386a of the device 38 is turned on (or flashes), and a sound for notifying the big hit confirmation from the lower speaker 19b (in the present embodiment, “Cuin! Output.

  That is, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a one-notification effect by causing the variable winning device to emit light by the light emitting means. At this time, the effect control device 300 causes the light to be emitted in one notification effect according to the type of the variable winning device determined by the game control device 100 (that is, the type of the variable winning device that is opened and closed in the special game). It is comprised so that the kind of winning apparatus may be changed. Specifically, when the first special variation winning device 38 (first variation winning device) is opened and closed in the special game, the effect control device 300 performs the first light emitting means (LED board 386a) in the one-shot notification effect. LED 386a1, LED board 382a LED and LED board 383a LED), the first special variable winning device 38 is caused to emit light, while the second special variable winning device 39 (second variable winning device) is opened and closed in the special game. In the case of conversion, the second special variation winning device 39 is caused to emit light by the second light emitting means (LED provided in the LED board 395) in one notification effect.

Further, the gaming machine 10 includes sound generating means capable of generating game sounds, and the sound generating means is the upper speaker 19a (corresponding to the first special variable winning device 38 (first variable winning device)). First sound generating means) and a lower speaker 19b (second sound generating means) associated with the second special variable winning device 39 (second variable winning device).
When the first special variation winning device 38 emits light, the production control device 300 (one-shot notification means) generates a notification sound from the upper speaker 19a while causing the second special variation winning device 39 to emit light. Is configured to generate a notification sound from the lower speaker 19b.
Here, the upper speaker 19a associated with the first special variable winning device 38 is disposed closer to the first special variable winning device 38 than the second special variable winning device 39, and is connected to the second special variable winning device 39. The associated lower speaker 19b is arranged closer to the second special variation winning device 39 than the first special variation winning device 38.

It should be noted that, as a variation 1 of the one-announcement effect, it is also possible to configure the corresponding special prize winning device to emit light in the lighting mode (lighting pattern) set corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit.
In the case of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b), together with the type of special variable winning device (large winning mouth) that is opened as an execution mode of the special gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random number The number of rounds that can be executed is also determined, but one notification is made by causing the special variable winning device that is determined as the special variable winning device to be opened to emit light in the lighting mode set corresponding to the determined number of rounds. It is also possible to execute a production.
Here, the lighting mode set corresponding to the determined number of rounds can be acquired with reference to a lighting mode selection table as shown in FIG.

In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as a light emission mode determination unit that determines the light emission mode of the variable winning device by the light emission unit.
And as shown in FIG.113 (b), the light emission aspect of a variable prize apparatus is matched previously for every opening / closing aspect (in this embodiment, the number of rounds) of a variable prize apparatus, The light emission mode of the variable winning device in the single announcement effect is determined to be the light emission mode associated with the open / close mode (number of rounds) determined by the game control device 100 (open / close determining means).

  Specifically, for example, when the upper AT (second special variable winning device 39) is determined as the type of the special variable winning device to be opened, and “two-turn lighting” is acquired as the lighting mode from the lighting mode selection table. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the LEDs (that is, the LEDs arranged along the circumferential direction of the internal space P) included in the LED board 395 of the second special variation winning device 39 are arranged in a predetermined direction (in the present embodiment). In this case, the moving blinking effect that is sequentially turned on and off in the counterclockwise direction) is executed for two rotations (two laps). Thereby, it can be shown to the player as if the rotating body is rotating in the internal space P.

  In addition, for example, when the lower AT (first special variable winning device 38) is determined as the type of the special variable winning device to be opened and “4-turn lighting” is acquired as the lighting mode from the lighting mode selection table, 1 LED provided on the LED boards 382a and 383a of the special variable prize-winning device 38 (that is, the LED that illuminates the lens portion 381a disposed around the opening / closing door 38c) in a predetermined direction (in the present embodiment, the counterclockwise direction) The movement blinking effect that is sequentially turned on and off is executed for four rotations (four laps). Thereby, it is possible to show the player around the open / close door 38c as if the rotating body is rotating. In this case, not only the LEDs included in the LED boards 382a and 383a of the first special variable winning device 38, but also the LEDs included in the LED board 386a of the first special variable winning device 38 (that is, LEDs that light the open / close door 38c). It may be lit (flashing).

The first special variation winning device 38 may also be configured to include a pair of movable members that can be opened in a reverse “C” shape like the second special variation winning device 39.
In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the larger the number of rounds (value) of the big hit, the higher the probability that the number of rotations of moving blinking is higher. The present invention is not limited to this, and the rotational speed of the moving blinking can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

Further, as a second modification of the one notification effect, the effect movable member 393 is configured to be driven by a drive source that is separate from the guide movable member 392. As shown in FIG. It is also possible to configure the movable member 393 to operate.
Specifically, instead of the lighting mode selection table as shown in FIG. 113 (b), that is, the lighting mode selection table in which the number of rounds of jackpots and the lighting mode are associated with each other, as shown in FIG. 114 (b). Referring to the lighting mode selection table, that is, the lighting mode selection table in which the number of rounds of the big hit, the lighting mode, and the operation of the effect movable member 393 are associated, the lighting set corresponding to the determined number of rounds The mode and the operation of the effect movable member 393 are acquired. When “operation” is acquired as the operation of the effect movable member 393, the effect movable member 393 is operated together with the movement blinking effect by the second special variation winning device 39. At this time, the operation of the effect movable member 393 may be, for example, an operation that is in the second state (the state of the tilted posture) during the movement flashing effect by the second special variation winning device 39, or the second During the movement flashing effect by the special variation winning device 39, an operation of alternately repeating the conversion between the first state and the second state may be performed.
On the other hand, when “non-operation” is acquired as the operation of the effect movable member 393, only the movement blinking effect by the second special variation winning device 39 is executed without operating the effect movable member 393.

  If the first special variable winning device 38 is configured to include a pair of movable members that can be opened in a reverse “C” shape like the second special variable winning device 39, a single notification effect is provided. It is also possible to perform an effect of operating one of the movable members at the time (that is, during the movement flashing effect by the first special variation winning device 38).

[Preliminary judgment command reception processing]
Next, details of the prior determination command reception process (step B49) in the first scene control process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 105, in the prior determination command receiving process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not a prior determination command (symbol information command, variation pattern random number command) has been received. Determination is made (step B301).
If it is determined in step B301 that the advance determination command has not been received (step B301; No), the advance determination command reception process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B301 that a prior determination command has been received (step B301; Yes), the content of the received prior determination command is saved in the corresponding hold (start) storage area (step B302).
Next, it is checked whether or not the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command is missing symbol information (step B303), and it is determined whether or not the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command is missing symbol information. Determination is made (step B304).

If it is determined in step B304 that the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command is out of symbol information (step B304; Yes), the variation group selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 93, FIG. 94) (step B305), and a reach system corresponding to the variation pattern random number command included in the received advance determination command is acquired from the prepared variation group selection table (step B307).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B304 that the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command is not out of symbol information (step B304; No), that is, the symbol information command included in the received prior determination command is the jackpot symbol information. If it is, prepare a variation group selection table (see FIG. 92) at the time of big hit corresponding to the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (step B306), and receive from the prepared fluctuation group selection table A reach system corresponding to the variation pattern random number command included in the prior determination command is acquired (step B307).

Next, a pre-effect distribution table (see FIG. 106) is set (step B308), and the pre-effect notification mode is based on the symbol information command included in the received pre-judgment command and the reach system acquired in step B307. The pre-effect selection process (step B309) for selecting is executed.
Next, the pre-production information related to the selected pre-production notification mode or the like is saved in the target hold (start) storage area (step B310), and the pre-determination command reception process is terminated.

For example, when “pending: no change” is selected as the notification mode of the pre-production, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display m1 of the default color (white in this embodiment) is displayed. Is the first storage display area R1 of the display area R (that is, the storage display area where the number of decorative special figure start storage displays m1 corresponding to the first start storage appears) or the second storage display area R2 (that is, the second start The number of decoration special figure start storage displays m1 corresponding to the storage is displayed in the storage display area).
In addition, for example, when “hold: blue”, “hold: yellow”, “hold: red” or “hold: rainbow” is selected as the notification mode of the pre-effect, a blue, yellow, red, or rainbow color decoration feature is selected. The figure start memory display m1 is displayed in the first memory display area R1 or the second memory display area R2 of the display area R.
That is, the display control apparatus 300 stores the display area R in which the number of decoration special figure start storage displays m1 (storage display) corresponding to the start storage stored in the game control apparatus 100 (start storage means) is set as the display area R. A memory display means capable of displaying on R1 and R2 is provided.

Here, when the action of the shutter unit 1500 is set by the action setting (step B218) of the accessory corresponding to the action timing of the changing process (FIG. 102), the shutter unit 1500 is being executed during the change display game. Is in a shielding state, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the first special symbol n1, the second special symbol n2, and the third special symbol n3 that are variably displayed at the center of the display region R. Are blocked by each shutter (left back shutter unit 1630, left front shutter unit 1650, right back shutter unit 1730, right front shutter unit 1750).
Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) is in a shielding state based on the operation of the rendering mechanism unit 1000 (movable rendering device) during the execution of the variable display game, a plurality of identification information (special symbols) n1 to n3) are configured to be reduced and displayed on a specific part (that is, a part that is exposed so as to be visually recognized by the visual recognition window W when the shutter unit 1500 is shielded). Has been. Thereby, even when the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielded state, the special symbols n1 to n3 can be visually recognized through the visual window portion W. Note that the special symbols n1 to n3 may be displayed in a reduced size on a specific part before or after each shutter reaches the shielding position. However, the special symbols n1 to n3 are always displayed. From the viewpoint of enabling visual recognition and the like, it is preferable that each shutter is before reaching the shielding position (particularly at the same time as the timing when the left front shutter unit 1650 and the right front shutter unit 1750 start moving from the initial position).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the storage display areas (the first storage display area R1 and the second storage display area R2) are in operation of the effect mechanism unit 1000 (movable effect device). The position is set to be shielded by the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the rendering mechanism unit 1000 is not in operation, the game control device is provided in the storage display areas (the first storage display area R1 and the second storage display area R2) as shown in FIG. 107 (a). While displaying the decorative special figure start memory display m1 (memory display) in a display mode associated with the determination result of 100 (preliminary determination means), the operation of the effect mechanism unit 1000 is shown in FIG. 107 (b). Thus, substantially simultaneously with the reduced display of the special symbols n1 to n3 on the specific part, the abbreviated special figure start memory display m2 (memory display) is displayed by switching to the abbreviated form in which only the start memory number can be grasped at the specific part. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the abbreviated special figure start memory display m2 is expressed in numerical notation (in this embodiment, “special 1 × N * (N * = number of first start memories) special 2 × N ** (N ** = Number of second start memories))). Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), a pre-effect (pre-read effect) based on the start-up memory display is not possible.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the first storage display area R1 and the second storage display area R2 are set to positions behind the partition wall member 450 in the display area R. The decorative special figure start memory display m1 appearing in the first memory display area R1 and the second memory display area R2 is configured to be visually recognized through the partition wall member 450 capable of transmitting light. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first storage display area R1 and the second storage display area R2 can be arbitrarily changed as long as the positions are shielded by the shutter unit 1500 in the shielding state.
Further, the first memory display area R1 and the second memory display area R2 are set to positions that are not shielded by the shutter unit 1500 during the operation of the effect mechanism unit 1000, that is, regardless of the operation state of the effect mechanism unit 1000. It is also possible to set a portion (that is, a portion that is exposed so as to be visible by the visual recognition window portion W in the shielded state of the shutter unit 1500. In the case of this embodiment, the upper central portion of the display region R).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b), as the identification information, in addition to the special symbols n1 to n3, a fourth symbol for notifying the player that it is changing. (The fourth symbol n41 for the first special figure variation display game and the fourth symbol n42 for the second special figure variation display game) are also displayed in the display region R. That is, the plurality of identification information includes normal identification information (special symbols n1 to n3) variably displayed in a plurality of digits, and specific identification information (fourth symbols n41 and n42) variably displayed corresponding to the normal identification information. ) And are included.
The fourth symbols n41 and n42 are specific parts (that is, parts exposed to be visible by the visual window portion W in the shielded state of the shutter unit 1500) regardless of the operating state of the effect mechanism unit 1000 (movable effect device). In the case of the embodiment, the display is variably displayed in the fourth symbol variation display region R3 set in the upper center portion of the display region R). At this time, the fourth symbols n41 and n42 are displayed smaller than the visual recognition window portion W regardless of the operating state of the effect mechanism unit 1000, and the size thereof is maintained.

The fourth symbol n41 for the first special figure variation display game is variably displayed while the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game is executed on the display device 41, and the second special figure is displayed. The fourth symbol n42 for the variation display game is variably displayed while the decoration special diagram variation display game corresponding to the second special diagram variation display game is being executed on the display device 41.
At that time, the fourth symbols n41 and n42 are arranged in the order shown in FIG. 109, that is, “white” → “blue” → “yellow” → “green” → “orange” → “pink” → “red” → “ It is displayed so as to change colors in the order of “white”..., And is stopped at a color corresponding to the result of the game at substantially the same time as the stoppage of the decorative special figure change display game. Specifically, if the game result is “out of”, the fourth symbols n41 and n42 are stopped and displayed as “white”.

As a modification of the fourth symbol display region R3, as shown in FIG. 108, the fourth symbol display region R2 is provided on the movable mechanism portion 610 (see FIG. 27) provided in the upper effect unit 600 of the center case unit 40. It is also possible to provide an area partition portion Y for enclosing and partitioning.
In this case, the left front shutter unit 1650 and the right front shutter unit 1750 are configured so as not to collide with the area partition member Y when moving to the shielding position or when reaching. In this case, it is also possible to provide a light source dedicated to the region partition unit Y so that the region partition unit Y emits light in a color corresponding to the variable display of the fourth symbols n41 and n42 (see FIG. 109). .
As described above, by providing the area partition portion Y surrounding the fourth symbol display region R2, for example, a malfunction occurs in the shutter unit 1500, and normally the fourth symbols n41 and n42 are operated so as not to be concealed (shielded). Even when the shutter tries to perform an operation of concealing the fourth symbols n41 and n42, the area partition member Y serves as a stopper. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in the shutter unit 1500, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbols n41 and n42 from being concealed (shielded).

  As a modification of the fourth symbol n41, n42, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), in addition to the fourth symbol n41, n42, a pseudo symbol (the first symbol) that simulates the variation display of the fourth symbol n41, n42. A first pseudo symbol n43 that simulates the fourth symbol n41 for the 1 special symbol variation display game, and a second pseudo symbol n44 that simulates the fourth symbol n42 for the second special symbol variation display game. Is also possible. Here, the effect control device 300 performs pseudo-variation in which pseudo-identification information (pseudo symbols n43, n44) that simulates the variation display of the specific identification information (fourth symbols n41, n42) is variably displayed on the display region R of the display device 41. It serves as a display means.

As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the pseudo symbols n43 and n44 are variably displayed in a variation pattern corresponding to the game result. That is, if the result of the first special figure variation display game being executed is “2R normal big hit”, the first pseudo symbol n43 is “white” → “blue” or “?” → “yellow” → “green”. → "Orange" or "?" → "Pink" → "Red" → "White" ... The display is variably displayed so that the color is switched at the same timing as the switching timing of the fourth symbol n41. Here, “blue” or “?” Means that the first pseudo symbol n43 of blue may be displayed, or the first pseudo symbol n43 marked with “?” May be displayed. Means that. “?” May be other notice display (for example, “heat”) instead of “?”. That is, the display form of the pseudo identification information (pseudo symbols n43, n44) includes a notice display form for notifying the result of the running variable display game (result notice information (“?” (Or “heat”, etc.)). )) Is included, and the production control device 300 (pseudo variation display means) corresponds to the switching of the specific identification information (fourth symbol n41, n42) as the display mode of the pseudo identification information (pseudo symbol n43, n44). And a notice display mode (result notice information) is displayed at a specific switching timing.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), a region partitioning portion Y for partitioning the fourth symbol display region R2 in which the fourth symbols n41 and n42 and the pseudo symbols n43 and n44 appear is provided. It is possible to do this, or it can be configured not to provide it. Moreover, when providing the area division part Y, as shown to Fig.110 (a), the area division part Y may be a shape which partitions off each symbol which appears in 4th symbol display area R2, or a partition. There may be no shape.

  In the present embodiment, the movable movable part 650 of the upper effect unit 600, the movable decorative member 750 of the side effect unit 700, the movable part 1410 of the effect mechanism unit 1000, and the shutters (the left rear shutter unit 1630, the left front side). The shutter unit 1650, the right back shutter unit 1730, the right front shutter unit 1750) and the like correspond to the board effect device 44. The LED in the upper effect unit 600, the LED in the side effect unit 700, and the effect mechanism unit 1000 An LED or the like corresponds to the board decoration device 46.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the display device 41 (display panel) capable of displaying an image according to the progress of the game, and the storage case 504 for storing the display device 41, , The storage case 504 includes a first case member 510 that covers the display device 41 from one side (front side (front side in the case of this embodiment)), and the other side of the display device 504 (front and back side). In the case of the present embodiment, a second case member 502 covering from the back side (rear side) is provided, and the first case member 510 includes a case engagement receiving portion 521 (engagement receiving portion) provided on the second case member 520. ) And an upper case engaging piece 513 (elastic engaging piece) for maintaining the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 in a closed state, and one end portion of the display device 41 ( In the case of this embodiment, the lower end ) And a lower regulating piece 515 (panel abutting portion) for regulating the movement of the display device 41, and the upper case engaging piece 513 is the other end portion of the display device 41 (this embodiment). In this case, it extends from the position corresponding to the upper end portion) toward the second case member 520, and is disposed closer to the second case member 520 than the display device 41. An upper case engagement claw portion 513a (case engagement claw portion) that can be engaged with the case engagement receiving portion 521 by a restoring force and an upper case engagement claw portion 513a engage with the case engagement receiving portion 521. A panel pressing portion 513b capable of pressing the other end portion (upper end portion) of the display device 41 toward the lower regulating piece 515 in this state.

  Accordingly, since the upper case engaging piece 513 includes the upper case engaging claw portion 513a and the panel pressing portion 513b, the upper case for maintaining the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 in the closed state. The display device 41 stored in the storage case 504 can be fixed using the engagement piece 513. For this reason, it is possible to increase the efficiency of the storage operation of the display device 41 in the storage case 503, and the unnecessary efficiency is not required, so that the storage efficiency of the display device 41 in the storage case 504 is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the display device 41 is covered from the front side (front side) with the first case member 510 including the upper case engagement piece 513 and the second case member 520 including the case engagement receiving portion 521 and the like. 41 is configured to cover from the back side (rear side), but is not limited thereto, and the display device 41 is covered from the back side (rear side) with the first case member 510 including the upper case engagement piece 513 and the like. It is possible to cover the display device 41 from the front side (front side) with the second case member 520 including the case engagement receiving portion 521 and the like. However, the display window 510a needs to be provided on the case member side that covers the display device 41 from the front side (front side).

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the upper case engagement claw portion 513a (case engagement claw portion) has the lower restriction piece 515 (panel contact) by the elastic restoring force of the upper case engagement piece 513. The case engagement receiving portion 521 is configured to engage with the case engagement receiving portion 521 by moving in a direction away from the contact portion (upward in the case of the present embodiment). The upper case engaging piece 513 is configured to engage with the upper case engaging claw portion 513a against the elastic restoring force of the upper case engaging piece 513.

Therefore, in the state where the case engagement receiving portion 521 and the upper case engagement claw portion 513a are engaged, the case engagement receiving portion 521 presses the upper case engagement piece 513 toward the lower restriction piece 515. It is possible to maintain the pressed state by the panel pressing portion 513b.
Further, when the upper case engagement claw portion 513 a moves in the direction approaching the lower restriction piece 515 to engage with the case engagement receiving portion 521, the upper case engagement piece 513 is connected to the case engagement receiving portion 521. Since the upper case engaging piece 513 is exposed in a covering state, the exposed portion of the upper case engaging piece 513 increases and the upper case engaging piece 513 is likely to be damaged. By being configured to engage with the case engagement receiving portion 521 by moving in a direction away from the regulating piece 515, a part of the upper case engagement piece 513 is protected by the case engagement receiving portion 521, and the upper side. Since the exposed part of the case engaging piece 513 is reduced, the upper case engaging piece 513 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, the upper case engagement claw 513a is engaged with the case engagement receiving portion 521 by moving in a direction away from the lower restriction piece 515 by the elastic restoring force of the upper case engagement piece 513. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper case engaging claw portion 513a moves in the direction approaching the lower regulating piece 515 by the elastic restoring force of the upper case engaging piece 513. It is also possible to configure to engage with the engagement receiving portion 521.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the lower regulation piece 515 (panel contact portion) contacts the lower end portion of the display device 41 (display panel) from below, and the upper case engagement piece 513. The (elastic engagement piece) is provided at a position corresponding to the upper end portion of the display device 41, and the panel pressing portion 513b is configured to press the upper end portion of the display device 41 toward the lower regulating piece 515 side. .

Therefore, when the upper case engagement piece 513 is provided at a position corresponding to the lower end portion of the display device 41, the upper case engagement piece 513 receives the weight of the display device 41, and the upper case engagement Although the piece 513 may be damaged, the upper case engaging piece 513 is configured to be provided at a position corresponding to the upper end portion of the display device 41, so that the upper case engaging piece 513 includes the display device 41. Therefore, the upper case engagement piece 513 can be prevented from being damaged due to the weight of the display device 41.
Moreover, since the panel press part 513a presses the display apparatus 41 along the gravity direction, the display apparatus 41 can be pressed efficiently and it is easy to fix the display apparatus 41.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the display device 41 (display panel) has a rectangular shape, and the first case member 510 has one end portion of the display device 41 (this embodiment). In the case of the embodiment, the second case member 520 is provided with a side regulating piece 516 (side end abutting portion) that can abut against the left end portion) and regulate the movement of the display device 41. A panel pressing piece 524 (elastic pressing piece) capable of pressing the display device 41 toward the side regulating piece 516 by contacting the other side end (right end in the case of this embodiment). The panel pressing piece 524 is configured to come into contact with the other end (right end) of the display device 41 when the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are closed.

  Therefore, since the lateral movement of the display device 41 can be restricted by the side portion restricting piece 516 and the panel pressing piece 524, the display device 41 does not move in the storage case 504.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the first case member 510 is provided with the pressing auxiliary portion 519 for assisting the pressing of the display device 41 (display panel) by the panel pressing piece 524 (elastic pressing piece). It can also be configured to include. This auxiliary pressing portion 519 is opposite to the other end of the display device 41 (the right end in this embodiment) when the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are closed. To the panel pressing piece 524.

  In this case, since the pressing of the display device 41 by the panel pressing piece 524 can be assisted by the pressing assist portion 519, the display device 41 can be accurately fixed in the storage case 504.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the display device is provided by protruding on the upper case engagement piece 513 (elastic engagement piece) toward the lower regulation piece 515 (panel contact portion). It is also possible to comprise 41 (display panel) with a panel engagement claw portion 518 that engages from the front and back other side (in the case of this embodiment, from the back side (rear side)).

  In this case, the display device 41 can be held by the first case member 510 when the first case member 510 and the second case member 520 are closed by the panel engaging claw portion 518, so that the display on the storage case 504 is performed. The storage efficiency of the device 41 is further improved.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the closed state where the ball introduction port 391a is closed and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is not accepted, and the ball introduction port 391a is opened and the game area 32 flows down. In the gaming machine 10 including the second special variable winning device 39 (variable winning device) having a guide movable member 392 (movable member) that can be converted into an open state for receiving a game ball, the second special variable winning device 39 includes: A predetermined first state (in the case of this embodiment, a state of standing posture) and a second state (in the case of this embodiment, a state of tilted posture) for emphasizing the conversion of the guide movable member 392 to the open state An effect movable member 393 that can be converted is provided, and the effect movable member 393 is converted from the first state to the second state as the guide movable member 392 is converted from the closed state to the open state.

  Accordingly, since the effect movable member 393 is converted to the second state in accordance with the conversion of the guide movable member 392 to the open state, the opening operation of the second special variation winning device 39 can be emphasized. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an image as if the second special variation winning device 39 is performing a large opening operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the second special variable winning device 39 (variable winning device) has a ball introduction port 391a on one side (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper left side). An internal space P is formed and the inflow of game balls is restricted, and the production movable member 393 is disposed in the internal space P and is in a first state (in the case of the present embodiment, a state of standing posture) and a second state. (In the case of this embodiment, it is configured to be convertible to a tilted posture state).

  Therefore, the effect movable member 393 is disposed in the internal space P and can be converted into the first state (the standing posture state) and the second state (the tilted posture state). The winning state of the game ball in the second special variable winning device 39 does not change. Therefore, the opening operation of the second special variable winning device 39 can be emphasized without changing the winning state of the game ball in the second special variable winning device 39.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the guide movable member 392 (movable member) becomes a standing posture in the closed state and closes the ball inlet 391a, while in the open state, the side gaming area. 32, the ball introduction port 391a is opened and the effect movable member 393 is disposed in the internal space P so as to face the guide movable member 392, and is in the standing posture in the first state. In the two states, the tilting posture is directed toward the side opposite to the guide movable member 392.

  Therefore, the effect movable member 393 emphasizes the opening operation of the second special variable prize winning device 39 by operating symmetrically with the guide movable member 392, so that the ball introduction port 391a is opened to the maximum. An image can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable member 393 is disposed in the internal space P so as to face the guide movable member 392, and the first state is the standing posture and the second state is the tilting posture. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the conversion of the guide movable member 392 to the open state can be emphasized in the second state, the arrangement position of the effect movable member 393, the first state, and the second state are arbitrarily determined as appropriate. Can be changed.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the second special variable winning device 39 (variable winning device) is a region partition member 391 (partition member) having a predetermined thickness that defines the internal space P. The area partition member 391 is formed with a retracting portion 391e that is recessed outward at a position corresponding to the effect movable member 393, and the effect movable member 393 is tilted at the tip end portion in the second state (the tilted posture state). The (upper end) is configured to enter the retracting portion 391e.

  Therefore, since the retracting portion 391e is formed in the area partition member 391, the second special variable prize winning device 39 is required even if the effect movable member 393 is enlarged or the movable range of the effect movable member 393 is set wide. You don't have to make it bigger. Therefore, the opening operation of the second special variable winning device 39 can be emphasized without increasing the second special variable winning device 39.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the second special variable winning device 39 (variable winning device) is such that the game ball received in the internal space P from the ball introduction port 391a is the effect movable member 393. The flow-down regulation wall 390g (regulation wall part) which can regulate moving to the side is provided.

  Accordingly, the game ball received in the internal space P is restricted from moving toward the effect movable member 393 by the flow-down restricting wall 390g, so that the game ball received in the internal space P is in the effect movable member 393. Does not adversely affect operation.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, in the gaming machine 10 provided with the upper presentation unit 600 (movable presentation device) capable of performing the presentation operation according to the progress of the game, the upper stage unit. 600 includes a decoration movable unit 650 (movable production member) capable of performing a production operation, and a movable mechanism unit 610 (drive mechanism unit) for causing the decoration movable unit 650 to perform a production operation. The unit 610 includes a motor 614 (electrical drive source) capable of generating a driving force for operating the decorative movable unit 650, and a driving operation for operating the decorative movable unit 650 by the driving force from the motor 614. Drive members (link rotary plate 612 and decorative rotary plate 613), and the drive member is arranged behind the decorative movable portion 650 and has a front surface thereof. A decorative rotating plate 613 (decorating portion) provided with a predetermined decoration is provided, and the decorative movable portion 650 is positioned in front of the driving member and covers the decorative rotating plate 613 before operation by the driving member. During the operation by the member, the decorative rotating plate 613 is configured to be visible from the front of the driving member.

Accordingly, the decorative rotating plate 613 provided on the driving members (the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613) is hidden and displayed in relation to the operation of the decorative movable portion 650, and therefore the driving member for operating the decorative movable portion 650 produces effects. The effect can be improved.
In addition, since the decorative rotating plate 613 is provided on the front surface of the driving member, the decorative rotating plate 613 moves when the driving member operates. That is, if the decoration movable part 650 is operated by the motor 614 via the driving member, the decoration rotation plate 613 also moves, so that the effect is improved and the decoration effect is also improved.
Further, since the decorative rotating plate 613 is provided on the front surface of the driving member, it is not necessary to make the driving member invisible to the player, and space can be saved.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the driving members (the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613) are centered on the first rotating shaft pin 611b (rotating shaft) extending in the front-rear direction. The engagement pin 612b (drive engagement portion) is provided at a position eccentric from the first rotation shaft pin 611b, and the decorative movable portion 650 (movable effect member) is an engagement member. An engagement hole 653b (movable engagement portion) that engages with the coupling pin 612b is provided, and is configured to move in a direction orthogonal to the first rotation shaft pin 611b when the drive member rotates during operation by the drive member. Yes.

Therefore, since the driving members (the link rotating plate 612 and the decorative rotating plate 613) are disk-shaped rotating bodies, the surface area of the decorative rotating plate 613 is increased compared to the case where the driving member is an arm-shaped rotating body. Can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to make the decorative rotating plate 613 stand out and improve the effect.
Further, since the driving member is a disk-shaped rotating body that rotates around the first rotation shaft pin 611b extending in the front-rear direction, the position does not move even if it operates. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the decorative rotating plate 613 firmly.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the upper effect unit 600 (movable effect device) operably supports the decorative movable part 650 (movable effect member), and the decorative movable part 650 The movable guide unit 630 (intermediate member) is provided between the movable mechanism unit 610 (driving mechanism unit), and the movable guide unit 630 exposes the decorative rotating plate 613 (decorative unit) to the front. 631a (exposed portion) is provided, and the movable mechanism portion 610 is covered with the decorative rotating plate 613 exposed from the exposed opening 631a.

  Accordingly, since the movable guide portion 630 covers the movable mechanism portion 610 other than the decorative rotating plate 613, the decorative rotating plate 613 can be conspicuous.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the drive members (the link rotary plate 612 and the decorative rotary plate 613) are the link rotary plates that receive transmission of the driving force from the motor 614 (electrical drive source). A decorative rotating plate 613 (decorating portion) is arranged on the front side of 612 (main body portion), and the decorative rotating plate 613 is arranged in a state where the link rotating plate 612 is arranged behind the movable guide portion 630 (intermediate member). Is configured to face the front of the movable guide part 630 from the exposure opening 631a (exposed part).

  Therefore, since the decorative rotating plate 613 faces the front of the movable guide portion 630 from the exposure opening 631a, the decorative rotating plate 613 can be more conspicuous.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 executes a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the start condition, and the variable display game When a special result is determined in advance, a special gaming state advantageous to the player can be generated, and a plurality of pieces of expectation information E1 indicating the degree of expectation that the variable display game will have a special result is displayed on the decoration rotating plate 613 (decoration portion). It is also possible to provide an expectation degree display portion E on which .about.E3 is displayed. The plurality of expectation level information E1 to E3 is displayed as an expectation level so that the expectation level information set with a higher expectation level becomes visible as the operation amount (movement amount) of the decorative movable unit 650 (movable effect member) increases. Arranged in part E.

  In this case, the degree of expectation of the variable display game can be associated with the amount of motion of the decoration movable unit 650, so that the expectation of the variable display game can be effectively increased by the upper effect unit 600.

  Moreover, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, in the gaming machine 10 including the side effect unit 700 (movable effect device) capable of performing the effect operation according to the progress of the game, The effect unit 700 includes a movable decorative member 750 (movable effect member) capable of performing an effect operation, and a drive mechanism unit 720 (drive mechanism) for causing the movable decoration member 750 to perform an effect operation. The decoration member 750 is connected to the base end side movable body 752 (first movable body) 752 that operates by receiving a driving force from the drive mechanism unit 720 and the base end side movable body 752 via the joint portion J, and The distal end side movable body 753 (second movable body) capable of interlocking with the end side movable body 752 and the proximal end side movable body 752 and the distal end side movable body 752 are urged so that the joint portion J extends. A biasing member 754, and a base When a bending force exceeding a predetermined threshold is applied to the joint portion J by operating the side movable body 752, the distal-side movable body 753 operates differently from the proximal-side movable body 752 around the joint portion J. It is configured.

  Accordingly, when a bending force exceeding a predetermined threshold value (exceeding the urging force of the urging member 754) is applied to the joint portion J by operating the proximal end side movable body 752, the distal end side movable body 753 moves the joint portion J to the joint portion J. Since the operation different from the proximal end movable body 752 is performed as the center, the presentation operation of the movable decorative member 750 is diversified depending on the magnitude of the bending force applied to the joint portion J, and the entertainment of the game can be effectively improved. It becomes possible.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the side effect unit 700 (movable effect device) is provided at a position away from the joint portion J in the distal end side movable body 753 (second movable body). A metal pin 753c (magnetic body) and a permanent magnet 730 (attractor) capable of magnetically attracting the metal pin 753c, and the base pin side in a state where the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are magnetically attracted. When the movable body 752 is operated, a bending force exceeding a threshold is applied to the joint portion J.

  Therefore, if the base side movable body 752 performs an effect operation in a state where the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are magnetically attracted, the bending force exceeding the threshold value (exceeding the urging force of the urging member 754) is applied to the joint portion J. Therefore, it is possible to cause the movable decorative member 750 to continuously (continuously) perform an effect operation of bending the joint portion J, and to make the effect of the movable decorative member 750 rich in change.

  Note that a hard magnetic body such as a permanent magnet may be provided on the distal end side movable body 753 (second movable body), and a soft magnetic body such as a metal pin may be provided on the unit base member 710. That is, the magnetic body may be a hard magnetic body such as a permanent magnet, and the attracting portion may be a soft magnetic body such as a metal pin.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the base-side movable body exceeds a predetermined operation width in a state where the metal pin 753c (magnetic body) and the permanent magnet 730 (attracting portion) are magnetically attracted. When 752 (first movable body) is operated, the attracting state between the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 is released, and the joint portion J is released from the bending force.

  Therefore, if the proximal end side movable body 752 is operated beyond the predetermined operation width in a state where the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are magnetically attracted, the attracted state of the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 is released and the joint is moved. Since the portion J is released from the bending force, the movable decorative member 750 can perform an effect operation that extends the joint portion J by the urging force of the urging member 754, that is, an effect operation that is not caused by the drive mechanism unit 720. it can.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the base end side movable body 752 (first movable body) in a state where the metal pin 752c (magnetic body) and the permanent magnet 730 (adsorbing portion) are not magnetically attracted. When the movement of the body) is stopped or reversed, a bending force exceeding a threshold value is applied to the joint portion J by at least the weight of the distal end side movable body 753 (second movable body).

  Therefore, if the operation of the proximal end side movable body 752 is stopped or reversed in a state where the magnetic pin 752c and the permanent magnet 730 are not attracted by magnetic force, the threshold value is exceeded at the joint portion J due to at least the weight of the distal end side movable body 753 ( Since the bending force (exceeding the urging force of the urging member 754) is applied, the effect decoration member 750 is not caused by the effect operation that bends the joint portion J by at least the weight of the distal end side movable body 753, that is, the drive mechanism portion 720. A production operation can be performed.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the movable decorative member 750 (movable effect member) normally has a proximal-side movable body 752 (first movable body) and a distal-side movable body 753 (first movable body). The metal pin 753c (magnetic body) and the permanent magnet 730 (attracting part) are magnetically attracted in a state where the two movable bodies are arranged in series in the vertical direction.

  Accordingly, in the normal state, the base pin side movable body 752 and the distal end side movable body 753 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, and the metal pin 753c and the permanent magnet 730 are magnetically adsorbed. It is possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to J and the biasing member 754, and the durability of the movable decorative member 750 can be improved.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner on the display device 41 is executed on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, and the special display predetermined by the variable display game is executed. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, it is possible to convert the display area R of the display device 41 into a shielding state for shielding and a releasing state for releasing the shielding. Effect mechanism unit 1000 (movable effect device) provided with a simple shutter unit 1500 (shielding member), an effect control device 300 (operation control means) capable of controlling the operation of the effect mechanism unit 1000, and a variable display game An effect control device 300 (variable display means) capable of performing display control, and the shutter unit 1500 is displayed in a shielded state. A viewing window portion W that exposes a specific part of the region R (in the case of the present embodiment, an upper center portion of the display region R) so as to be visible is provided, and the effect control device 300 performs the shutter unit 1500 during the execution of the variable display game. Is in a shielding state, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols n1 to n3) displayed in the display region R are reduced and displayed on a specific part (upper center portion of the display region R).

  Accordingly, the shutter unit 1500 is provided with a viewing window portion W that exposes a specific part of the display region R in a shielded state so that the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielded state during execution of the variable display game. Since a plurality of identification information (special symbols n1 to n3) displayed in the display area R is reduced and displayed on the specific part, the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielding state and the display area R is shielded. In addition, it becomes possible to visually recognize the identification information (special symbols n1 to n3) through the visual recognition window portion W, and it is possible to grasp the progress state of the variable display game.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) includes the left shutter unit 1600 (first shielding member) that shields one side (left side) of the display region R, and the display. A right shutter unit 1700 (second shielding member) that shields the other side (right side) of the region R, and the viewing window portion W is formed to straddle the left shutter unit 1600 and the right shutter unit 1700. .

  Therefore, since the viewing window W is formed so as to straddle the left shutter unit 1600 that shields the left side of the display region R and the right shutter unit 1700 that shields the right side of the display region R, a specific part of the display region R The shutter unit 1500 does not cross the front of (the upper center portion of the display region R), and it is possible to always visually recognize the specific part.

  In the present embodiment, the viewing window portion W is formed so as to straddle the left shutter unit 1600, the right shutter unit, and 1700. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the viewing window portion W is formed on the left shutter unit 1600. It is also possible to form only one of the right shutter unit and 1700.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the plurality of identification information varies in accordance with the normal identification information (special symbols n1 to n3) displayed in a variable manner with a plurality of digits and the normal identification information. The display control device 300 (variable display means) specifies the specific identification information regardless of the operating state of the effect mechanism unit 1000 (movable effect device). It is configured so as to be variably displayed at a part (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper center portion of the display region R).

Therefore, the specific identification information (the fourth symbols n41 and n42) is variably displayed at the specific part regardless of the operating state of the rendering mechanism unit 1000. Therefore, even if the specific identification information is always visible and the shutter unit 1500 operates. By confirming the specific identification information, the progress state of the variable display game can be grasped.
In addition, since the specific identification information is always displayed in a variable manner at a fixed position, there is no inconvenience that the specific identification information has to be searched for along with the operation of the shutter unit 1500.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the effect control device 300 (variable display means) is specific identification information (the fourth symbol n41) regardless of the operating state of the effect mechanism unit 1000 (movable effect device). , N42) is displayed smaller than the viewing window portion W, and the size thereof is maintained.

  Therefore, since the specific identification information (the fourth symbols n41 and n42) is displayed with a constant size and smaller than the visual recognition window W, the specific identification information is not shielded by the shutter unit 1500 and the size changes. Inconvenience that it becomes difficult to see by doing does not occur.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, pseudo identification information (pseudo symbols n43, n44) that simulates the variable display of the specific identification information (fourth symbols n41, n42) is displayed in the display area R. The display control device 300 (pseudo variation display means) is provided, and the display mode of the pseudo identification information (pseudo symbols n43, n44) includes a notice display mode (“?”) For notifying the result of the running variation display game. (Or “heat” or the like)), and the production control device 300 changes the display mode of the pseudo identification information (pseudo symbols n43 and n44) in response to switching of the specific identification information (fourth symbols n41 and n42). In addition to switching, a notice display mode is displayed at a specific switching timing.

  Therefore, since the pseudo-identification information (pseudo symbols n43, n44) includes the notice display mode of the variable display game, it is possible to execute a novel notice effect with the pseudo-identification information (pseudo symbols n43, n44).

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, a game control device 100 (starting storage means) capable of storing a start memory for executing a variable display game based on establishment of the start condition; A game control device 100 (preliminary determination means) capable of determining the result of the variable display game based on the start memory before the execution of the variable display game, and a number corresponding to the start memory stored in the game control device 100 An effect control device 300 (memory display means) capable of displaying the decorative special figure start memory display m1 (memory display) in the memory display areas R1, R2 set in the display area R, and the memory display area R1 , R1 is set at a position shielded by the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) during the operation of the rendering mechanism unit 1000 (movable rendering device). 300 displays the decoration special figure start memory display m1 in the display mode associated with the determination result of the game control means 100 in the memory display areas R1 and R2 when the effect mechanism unit 1000 is not in operation, while the effect mechanism unit During the operation of 1000, the abbreviated special figure start memory display m2 (memory display) is displayed by switching to an abbreviated mode in which only the start memory number can be grasped at a specific part (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper central portion of the display region R) It is configured to let you.

Therefore, when the effect mechanism unit 1000 is not in operation, the decorative special figure start memory display m1 is displayed in the memory display areas R1 and R2, while when the effect mechanism unit 1000 is in operation, a specific part (the upper center of the display area R is displayed). Since the abbreviated special figure start memory display m2 is displayed in (Part), it is possible to grasp the start memory number even during the operation of the shutter unit 1500.
In addition, during the operation of the rendering mechanism unit 1000, a memory display is displayed in an abbreviated manner on a specific part (upper center portion of the display region R) (that is, an abbreviated special figure start memory display m2 is displayed on the specific part). Therefore, it is not necessary to set the viewing window portion W to be extremely large, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the shutter unit 1500 from being attenuated.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) includes the left back shutter unit 1630 and the right back shutter unit 1730 (back side) that shield a part of the display region R. A shielding member) and a portion of the display region R that is different from at least the left back shutter unit 1630 and the right back shutter unit 1730 in front of the left back shutter unit 1630 and the right back shutter unit 1730. The left front shutter unit 1650 and the right front shutter unit 1750 (front shielding member) are provided, and the effect mechanism unit 1000 (movable effect device) includes a movable portion 1410 (movable effect member) capable of performing an effect operation. ), And the movable portion 1410 includes a shutter unit 1500. It is formed in front of the display area R at the time of conversion to the shielding state, on the side of the left back shutter unit 1630 and the right back shutter unit 1730 and behind the left front shutter unit 1650 and the right front shutter unit 1750. It is also possible to perform an effect operation in the effect space Q.

  Therefore, in this case, the movable portion 1410 is in front of the display region R when the shutter unit 1500 is converted to the shielding state, and is lateral to the left back shutter unit 1630 and the right back shutter unit 1730, and the left front shutter. Since the rendering operation is performed in the rendering space Q to be formed behind the unit 1650 and the right front shutter unit 1750, the movable portion 1410 performs the rendering operation in front of the display region R regardless of the operating state of the shutter unit 1500. It becomes possible. Further, since the movable portion 1410 can advance into the effect space Q from a position shifted from the front of the display device R, the movable portion 1410 advances when the shutter unit 1500 is in a shielding state. The movement cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, if the shutter unit 1500 is returned to the release state with the movable portion 1410 advanced (entered) into the production space Q, an image can be given to the player as if the movable portion 1410 appeared suddenly. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner on the display device 41 is executed on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, and the special display predetermined by the variable display game is executed. In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player based on the result, the concealed state (shielded state) for shielding the display region R of the display device 41 and the shielding are released. An effect mechanism unit 1000 (movable effect device) having a shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) that can be converted into a released state, and a game control device that determines whether or not a customer waiting state in which a game is not progressing 100 (customer waiting state determination means) and the production control device 300 (execution of a predetermined customer waiting operation based on the determination that the game control device 100 is in the customer waiting state) The production control device 300 operates the production mechanism unit 1000 to convert the shutter unit 1500 into a shielded state, and the power consumption state of the display device 41 is lower than that of the normal state. Is configured to convert to

  Accordingly, the shutter unit 1500 is converted to the shielding state and the display device 41 is converted to the power saving state based on the determination that the waiting state is the customer waiting state, so that power consumption related to the display device 41 is suppressed. This makes it possible to perform a customer waiting operation that makes it difficult for the player to feel unnaturalness. The power saving state means that the display unit 41 is darker than the normal state by darkening the display unit, setting the display luminance (backlight luminance) lower than normal, or turning off the power of the display device 41. This is a state in which the power consumption is reduced.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the effect control device 300 (customer waiting operation means) saves power to the display device 41 after the conversion of the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) to the shielding state is completed. It is configured to convert to a state.

  Therefore, since the display device 41 is converted to the power saving state after the conversion of the shutter unit 1500 to the shielding state is completed, the display device 41 is converted to the power saving state during the conversion to the shielding state of the shutter unit 1500. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the uncomfortable feeling that the player feels in connection with the switching of the display state.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, a decoration light emitting unit (such as an LED provided in the center case unit 40) capable of performing a decoration operation by emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode is provided. The production control device 300 (customer waiting operation means) is configured to cause the decorative light emitting unit to emit light in a predetermined customer waiting mode.

Therefore, since the decorative light emitting unit (such as the LED provided in the center case unit 40) emits light in a predetermined customer waiting mode based on the determination that the customer waiting state is established, even if the display region R is shielded. The decorative light emitting unit emits light, and the player can understand that the gaming machine 10 is operating.
Moreover, since the power consumption can be reduced when the decorative light emitting unit is used, compared with the case where the display device 41 is used for the customer waiting operation, it is possible to exert the effect of attracting customers while suppressing the power consumption.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the effect mechanism unit 1000 (movable effect device) can produce an effect light emitting unit (that can cause the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode ( The effect control device 300 (customer waiting operation means) is configured to cause the effect light emitting unit to emit light in a predetermined customer waiting mode.

Therefore, since the effect light emitting unit (the LED provided in each shutter) emits light in a predetermined customer waiting mode based on the determination that the customer is waiting, the decorative light emitting unit is provided even if the display region R is shielded. And the player can understand that the gaming machine 10 is operating.
Further, since the power consumption can be reduced when the effect light emitting unit is used, compared with the case where the display device 41 is used for the customer waiting operation, the effect of attracting customers can be exhibited while suppressing the power consumption.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the shutter storage portions T1 and T2 (storage portions) that store the shutter unit 1500 so as to cover the front surface of the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) in the released state. The shutter storage portions T1 and T2 are provided with a decorative portion (a winning ball passage member 470, a warp device 442, a movable decorative member 750, etc.) on the front side thereof, and light emitted from the rear is directed toward the decorative portion. The decoration portion is configured to be transmissive, and the decoration portion is an effect light emitting portion (LED provided on the left front shutter unit 1630 or the right front shutter unit 1730) that has passed through the shutter units T1 and T2 when the shutter unit 1500 is in the released state. It is configured to be illuminated by light.

  Therefore, when the shutter unit 1500 is in the released state, the decorative portions (the winning ball passage member 470, the warp device 442, the movable decorative member 750) provided in front of the shutter storage portions T1 and T2 that store the shutter unit 1500 are stored. Etc.) is lit by the light from the effect light-emitting section (the LEDs provided in the left front shutter unit 1630 and the right front shutter unit 1730), so that the shutter unit 1500 is not only in the shielding state but also in the release state. In addition, it is possible to produce an effect by the light from the effect light emitting unit.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the effect control device that cancels the customer waiting operation based on the determination that the game control device 100 (customer waiting state determination means) has returned from the customer waiting state. 300 (customer waiting canceling means), and the effect control device 300 operates the effect mechanism unit 1000 (movable effect device) to convert the shutter unit 1500 (shielding member) to the release state and to the release state. The display device 41 is configured to return from the power saving state to the normal state before completion.

  Accordingly, the shutter unit 1500 is converted to the released state based on the determination that the customer waiting state has been returned, and the display device 41 returns to the normal state before the conversion to the released state is completed. It is possible to avoid the player from being confused because nothing is displayed on the display device 41 when the conversion to the release state of 1500 is completed.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the special display predetermined by the variable display game is executed. As a result, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game for converting the variable winning devices (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) provided in the game area 32 from the closed state to the open state. 10, the light emitting means capable of causing the variable winning device to emit light, and the one-announcement effect for notifying that the result of the variable display game is derived before the result of the variable display game is derived. An effect control device 300 (single notification means), and the effect control device 300 is configured to execute the one notification effect by causing the variable winning device to emit light by the light emitting means. To have.

  Therefore, since the one-announcement effect is executed by causing the variable winning device to emit light, the executed effect is the one-notification effect, that is, the variable display game becomes a special result, and the variable winning device is converted to open / close. This makes it possible for the player to feel intuitively.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the variable winning device is the first special variable winning device 38 (first variable winning device) and the second special variable winning device 39 (second variable winning device). The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (LED 386a1 provided in the LED board 386a, LED provided in the LED board 382a and LED provided in the LED board 383a) for causing the first special variation winning device 38 to emit light, and a second special fluctuation. A game control device 100 (open / close determining means) that can determine the type of a variable winning device that is opened and closed in a special game. ), And the production control device 300 (single notification means) performs one notification notification according to the type of the variable winning device determined by the game control device 100. It is configured to vary the type of variation winning device to emit light in.

  Therefore, since the type of the variable winning device that emits light in the one-announcement effect changes according to the type of the variable winning device that is opened and closed in the special game, which variable winning device is opened and closed in the special game. The player can be informed by a single announcement effect.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the effect control device 300 (one notification means) is opened / closed converted in the first special variation winning device 38 (first variation winning device) in the special game. In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 is caused to emit light by the first light emitting means in one announcement effect, while the second special variation winning device 39 (second variable winning device) is opened and closed in the special game. Is configured to cause the second special variation winning device to emit light by the second light emitting means in one notification effect.

  Therefore, when the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed in the special game, the first special variable winning device 38 emits light in the single notification effect, while the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed in the special game. In the case of conversion, since the second special variable winning device 39 emits light in the one-shot notification effect, the player can be surely notified of which variable winning device is opened and closed in the special game by the one-shot notification effect. It can be tightened.

  In the present embodiment, when the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened and closed in the special game, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is caused to emit light in one notification effect, and the second special variable prize winning in the special game. When the device 39 is opened and closed, the second special variable winning device 39 is configured to emit light in one notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the type of the variable winning device determined by the game control device 100 (that is, the type of the variable winning device that is opened / closed converted in the special game), the type of the variable winning device that emits light in the one-shot notification effect changes. For example, when the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed in a special game, the second special variable winning device 39 is caused to emit light in one notification effect, and the second special variable winning device 39 is used in a special game. When the opening / closing conversion is performed, the first special variation winning device 38 can be configured to emit light in a single notification effect.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the sound generation means capable of generating a game sound is provided, and the sound generation means is a first special variation winning device 38 (first variation winning device). And an upper speaker 19a (second sound generating means) associated with the second special variable winning device 39 (second variable winning device). When the first special variation winning device 38 is caused to emit light, the production control device 300 (one-shot notification means) generates a notification sound from the upper speaker 19a, while the second special variation winning device 39 is caused to emit light. Is configured to generate a notification sound from the lower speaker 19b.

  Therefore, when the first special variable winning device 38 emits light, a notification sound is generated from the upper speaker 19a associated with the first special variable winning device 38, while the second special variable winning device 39 emits light. In this case, since the notification sound is generated from the lower speaker 19b associated with the second special variable winning device 30, the player can easily understand which variable winning device is the one-shot notification effect.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the upper speaker 19a (first sound generating means) is the first special variable winning device than the second special variable winning device 39 (second variable winning device). The lower speaker 19b (second sound generating means) is disposed closer to the second special variation winning device 39 than the first special variation winning device 38.

Accordingly, the upper speaker 19a associated with the first special variable winning device 38 is disposed closer to the first special variable winning device 38 than the second special variable winning device 39, and corresponds to the second special variable winning device 39. Since the attached lower speaker 19b is arranged closer to the second special variable winning device 39 than the first special variable winning device 38, which variable winning device is associated with the source of the notification sound in the one-shot notification effect. The player can clearly understand whether it is a single announcement production.
Further, since the announcement sound is close to the variable winning device emitting light, the light emission of the variable winning device is not overlooked.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the effect control device 300 (light emission mode determination unit) that determines the light emission mode of the variable winning device by the light emission unit is provided, and the game control device 100 (open / close determination unit). Is configured to determine an open / close mode (in the case of the present embodiment) of a variable winning device that performs open / close conversion in a special game from among a plurality of open / close modes having different degrees of advantage for the player. The variable control device is associated in advance with each opening / closing mode (number of rounds) of the variable winning device, and the effect control device 300 determines the light emitting mode of the variable winning device in the single announcement effect as the open / close mode (round) determined by the game control device 100. The light emission mode associated with (number) is determined.

  Therefore, the light emission mode of the variable winning device in the single announcement effect is determined as the light emission mode associated with the open / close mode (number of rounds) determined from a plurality of open / close modes having different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to specify the advantageous degree of the player in the special game from the type of the light emission mode, and to improve the player's expectation for the type of the light emission mode.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. It can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 19a upper speaker (sound generating means, first sound generating means)
19b Lower speaker (sound generating means, second sound generating means)
32 Game area 38 First special variable winning device (variable winning device, first variable winning device)
39 Second special variable winning device (variable winning device, second variable winning device)
41 Display device (display panel)
100 Game control device (starting storage means, prior determination means, waiting state determination means, opening / closing determination means)
300 effect control device (operation control means, fluctuation display means, pseudo fluctuation display means, storage display means, customer waiting operation means, customer waiting release means, single notification means, light emission mode determination means)
390g Flow restriction wall (restriction wall)
391 Area division member (division member)
391a Sphere introduction port 391e Retraction part 392 Guide movable member (movable member)
393 Production movable member 442 Warp device (decoration part)
470 prize ball passage member (decoration part)
504 Storage case 510 First case member 513 Upper case engagement piece (elastic engagement piece)
513a Upper case engagement claw portion (case engagement claw portion)
513b Panel pressing part 515 Lower regulation piece (panel contact part)
516 Side restriction piece (side edge contact part)
518 Panel engagement claw portion 519 Press auxiliary portion 520 Second case member 521 Case engagement receiving portion (engagement receiving portion)
524 Panel pressing piece (elastic pressing piece)
600 Upper production unit (movable production device)
610 Movable mechanism (drive mechanism)
611b First rotating shaft pin (rotating shaft)
612 Link rotating plate (driving member, main body)
612b engagement pin (drive engagement portion)
613 decorative rotating plate (drive member, decorative part)
614 Motor (electric drive source)
630 Movable guide (intermediate member)
631a Exposed opening (exposed part)
650 Decoration movable part (movable production member)
653b engagement hole (movable engagement portion)
700 Side effect unit (movable effect device)
720 Drive mechanism (drive mechanism)
730 Permanent magnet (adsorption part)
750 Movable decorative member (movable effect member, decorative part)
752 Base end side movable body (first movable body)
753 Front end side movable body (second movable body)
753c Metal Pin (Magnetic)
754 Energizing member 1000 Production mechanism unit (movable production device)
1410 Movable part (movable production member)
1500 Shutter unit (shielding member)
1600 Left shutter unit (first shielding member)
1630 Left back shutter unit (back side shielding member)
1650 Left front shutter unit (front shielding member)
1700 Right shutter unit (second shielding member)
1730 Right back shutter unit (back side shielding member)
1750 Right front shutter unit (front shielding member)
E Expectation degree display part E1-E3 Expectation degree information J Joint part m1 Decoration special figure start memory display (memory display)
m2 Omission special figure start memory display (memory display)
n1 1st special symbol (identification information, normal identification information)
n2 2nd special symbol (identification information, normal identification information)
n3 3rd special symbol (identification information, normal identification information)
n41, n42 4th design (identification information, specific identification information)
n43, n44 Pseudo symbol (pseudo identification information)
P Internal space Q Production space R Display area R1, R2 Storage display area T1, T2 Shutter storage part (storage part)
W Viewing window

Claims (1)

A variable winning device having a movable member that can be converted into a closed state that does not accept a game ball flowing down the game area by closing the ball introduction port and an open state that accepts a game ball flowing down the game area by opening the ball introduction port In the gaming machine
The variable winning device is:
An inner space in which the ball introduction port is formed on one side and the inflow of game balls is restricted;
An effect movable member disposed in the internal space and capable of being converted into a predetermined first state and a second state for emphasizing the conversion of the movable member into an open state;
A light emitting member capable of causing the variable winning device to emit light,
A gaming machine configured to convert the effect movable member from the first state to the second state in accordance with the conversion of the movable member from the closed state to the open state.

Images